Home

2014 ESCAPE Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. Rear Window WiIDCL ccccsccsesecsesteseessseeestesesesees 71 Recommended Towing Weights 177 RefUeliNg iiit eiii Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System 421 Remote Control Cat Finder msn Integrated Keyhead Transmitters Intelligent Access Key Remote Start Replacing the Battery Sounding a Panic Alarm Remote Start AUTOMATIC SeLINES inaning Heated and Cooled Devices Last Settings Removing a Headlamp Repairing Minor Paint Damage Replacement Parts Recommendation Collision Repairs Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical R DAIrS rare nnmmemnnnntiunnne 1 Warranty on Replacement Parts 12 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Only Reporting Safety Defects U S Only Roadsi Vehic Vehic Assistance Vehicles Sold In Sa ASSISTANCE iniiis niian Roadside Emergencies Roof Racks and Load Carriers Adjusting the Crossbar Running In See Breaking In 183 Running Out of FUEL 129 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container Haile a na d anA 129 Safety Belt Height Adjustment 30 Safety Belt Minder Es Belt Minder Index Safety Belts Principle of Operation Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime Conditions of operation Safety Canopy Safety Precautions Satellite Radio Satellite Radio Reception Factors SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service Troubleshooting Scheduled Maintenance Record
2. F20 15A Horn F21 5A Stop light switch F22 15A Battery monitor system F23 5A Relay coils F24 5A Light switch module F25 10A Power exterior mirror without door control unit F26 5A Keep alive power F27 15A Air conditioner clutch F28 1OA Vehicle power fuel injector 2 5L engine F29 25A Rear window defroster 198 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amprating Protected components F30 Not used F31 Not used F32 15A Vehicle power F33 10A Vehicle power 2 F34 10A Vehicle power 3 F35 15A Vehicle power 4 F36 5A Active grill shutters F37 10A Occupant classification sensor Passenger airbag deactivation indicator feed F38 5A Engine control module and transmission control module ignition feed F39 5A Daytime running lamps and headlamp control module ignition feed F40 5A Electronic power assist steering 15 feed F41 20A Body control module 15 feed F42 15A Rear wiper F43 15A Headlamp control module supply F44 15A Front fog daytime running lamps F45 Not used F46 4OA Smart wiper motor modules F47 Not used F48 5A Keypad RI Not used R2 Micro relay Horn R3 Not used R4 Micro relay Front fog daytime running lamps R5 Not used R6 E Not used 199 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components R7 Not used R8 Mini relay D
3. Information Displays Message Message Action Indicator Press brake to start Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle Ford KeyFree Key not Red Displayed when a valid key is not detected inside car within the vehicle See Keyless Starting page 123 Key Battery low Replace Displays when the key battery is low Change soon the battery as soon as possible See Remote Control page 44 Lighting Message Message Action Indicator Brake lamp Bulb fault Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned out Contact your authorized dealer Low beam Bulb fault Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb has burned out Contact your authorized dealer Headlamp fault Service Amber Displays when an electrical system problem required occurs with the headlamp system Contact your authorized dealer 95 Information Displays Maintenance Message Message Action Indicator Engine oil change due Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and requires a change See Engine Oil Check page 21 Brake fluid level low Red Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the Service now brake system should be inspected immediately See Brake Fluid Check page 215 Check fuel fill inlet Displays when the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed See Refueling page 130 MyKey Message Message Action
4. When you select Play Menu You can Play your music by artist album genre playlist track similar music or play all music You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device Select Source Select and play music from your USB port auxiliary input jack line in or stream music from your Bluetooth enabled phone SYNC USB Press OK to access music plugged into your USB port You can also plug in devices to charge them if supported by your device Once connected the system indexes any readable media files 309 SYNCTM When you select You can Bluetooth Audio This is a phone dependent feature that allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth enabled phone If supported by your device you can press SEEK to play the previous or next track SYNC Line In Press OK to select and play music from your portable music player over your vehicle s speakers Media Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings Once you turn these selections on they remain on you turn them off Press SEEK to play the previous or next track Shuffle Press OK to shuffle available media files in the current playlist To shuffle all media tracks you must select Play Allin the play menu and then select Shuffle Repeat Press OK to repeat any song Autoplay Turn autoplay on to listen to mu
5. 98 Information Displays Message Message Action Indicator Transmission Hot Wait Transmission is hot Wait as needed to let it cool 4WD fault Service Amber The system is not functioning correctly and required defaulted to front wheel drive See your authorized dealer See Using Four Wheel Drive page 140 4WD Off Amber Displays when the system disables automatic ally and enters front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components See Using Four Wheel Drive page 140 4WD temporarily Amber The system has overheated and defaulted to disabled front wheel drive See Using Four Wheel Drive page 140 4WD restored Displays when system operation has been restored See Using Four Wheel Drive page 140 Transmission not in Park Select P Displays as a reminder to shift into park Press brake to unlock gearshift lever Displays to request the operator to apply the brake as needed by the transmission Gearshift lever unlocked Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and free to select gears 99 Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Message Action Indicator Low Tire Pressure Amber Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 251 Tire Pressure Monitor Amber Displays when the tire pressure monitoring Fault system is malfunctioning If
6. Repeat off Repeat one Shuffle Shuffle off What s this Help If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse When prompted see the following Browse chart These commands are only available in USB mode and are device dependent Play playlist lt name gt BROWSE Play podcast lt name gt Play podcast episode lt name gt Album lt name gt All albums Play similar music All artists Play song lt name gt All audiobooks MyFord Touch it equipped BROWSE BROWSE All authors All composers All folders All genres All movies All music videos All playlists All podcasts All songs All TV shows All video playlists All video podcasts All videos Artist lt name gt Audiobook lt name gt Author lt name gt Composer lt name gt Folder lt name gt Genre lt name gt Playlist lt name gt Podcast lt name gt TV show lt name gt Video lt name gt Video playlist lt name gt 35 Video podcast lt name gt Help This command is only available in USB mode and is device dependent Supported MediaPlayers F
7. a E142589 When in use the rear safety belts should be placed in the belt guides on the outboard seatbacks Restraint of Pregnant Women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See the following figure Safety Belts E142590 Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNINGS After any vehicle crash the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could
8. There is no text information shown for currently selected frequency Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at website listed below HD2 HD7 stations not found when Sean is pressed Pressing Sean disables HD2 HD7 channel search No action required This is normal behavior Attp www ibiquity com automotive report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion SATELLITE RADIO iF EQUIPPED SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Audio System Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow an
9. This is an optional feature Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service Replace cabin air filter as required Replace engine air filter Every 5000 miles 8000 Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal km noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5000 miles 8000 Change engine oil and filter km or six months Perform multi point inspection Every 30000 miles 48000 Change automatic transmission fluid km This is an optional feature Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes See Engine Oil Check page 211 Exclusive use of E85 flex fuel vehicles only Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel 407 Scheduled Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD 2 a na Multi point inspection recommended O Signature a OC Multi point inspection recommended O Signature 408 Scheduled Maintenance O Repair Order Engine hours optional Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature O Repair Order O Multi point inspection recommended O Signature 409 Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order O Engine hours optional Multi point inspection reco
10. Unmute call Call Help Forward text messages This command is only available during an Listen to text message lt gt active call If you say Messages see the following Listen to text messages Messages chart for additional Reply to text messages commands Help INFORMATION E161889 A SYNC Services B SIRIUS Travel Link C Alerts D Calendar E SYNC Applications 359 MyFord Touch i equipped Under the Information menu you can access features such as SYNC Services SIRIUS Travel Link Alerts Calendar SYNC Applications 5 If your vehicle is equipped with 2 Navigation press the Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab SYNC Services If Equipped United States Only Note SYNC Services requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Phone page 353 Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Make sure your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SY
11. SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice Commands If you are listening to SIRIUS ns satellite radio press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio press the voice button and after the tone say SIRIUS then any of the following commands SIRIUS lt Channel name gt Preset lt gt SAT SAT preset lt gt SAT 1 SAT 1 Preset lt gt SAT 2 SIRIUS SAT 2 preset lt gt SAT 3 SAT 3 preset lt gt Sirius lt O 223 gt Sirius off Sirius on Sports game ut Tune Help If you have said Sports game see the following Sports game chart If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart MyFord Touch it equipped SPORTS GAME Tune to the lt college name gt game Tune to the lt team city gt game Tune to the lt team city gt lt team name gt game Tune to the lt team name gt game Help TUNE lt Channel Name gt Preset lt gt SAT SAT 1 SAT 1 preset lt gt SAT 2 SAT 2 preset lt gt SAT 3 SAT 3 preset lt gt Sirius lt 0 223 gt Help cD Press the lower left corner of the D touchscreen and then select the CD tab You can
12. 227 See Wipers and Washers 70 ANNEXE te 228 Wheel Nuts See Changing a Road Wheel 255 424 Wheels and Tires General Information Technical Specifications Windows and Mirrors Windshield Washers Windshield Wipers Intermittent Wipe Speed dependent wipers if equipped Wipers and Washers
13. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle from general maintenance to collision repairs Note Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops Please contact your dealer for details Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor system which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval This interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers Scheduled Maintenance When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display it is time for an oil change Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 miles 800 kilometers of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each oil change See Engine Oil Check page 211 If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles
14. E145298 234 Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Study your owner s manual and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury Four wheel drive system if equipped WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of four wheel drive vehicles Although a four wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed A vehicle equipped with four wheel drive when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot For four wheel drive vehicles a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the four wheel drive sys
15. Settings Sound Side Airbags Sitting in the Correct Position Snow Chains See Using Snow Chains Special Notices New Vehicle Limited Warranty Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles Special Instructions Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance Speed Control See Cruise Control Stability Control Principle of Operation Starter Switch See Ignition Switch 422 Starting a Gasoline Engine Failure to Start Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Important Ventilating Information Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is rlon A E 25 Vehicles with an Ignition Key 124 Vehicles with Keyless Start 124 Starting and Stopping the Engine 123 General Information Steering Electric Power Steering Steering Wheel Storage Compartments Sunroof See Moonrootf Sun Visors Illuminated Vanity Mirror Supplementary Restraints System Principle of Operation Symbols Glossary SYNC Applications and Services 911 Assist SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information TDI Vehicle Health Report SYNC General Information SYNC Troubleshooting T Technical Specifications See Capacities and Specifications The Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program U S Only 192 Tire Car ncia EA 236 Glossary of Tire Terminology 237 Information
16. n3 Navigation Navigation voice volume decrease Navigation voice volume increase Repeat instruction Show 3D Show heading up Show map Show north up Show route Show turn list Voice guidance off Voice guidance on Where am Zoom in lt nametag gt lt POI category gt Favorites Home Intersection Nearest lt POI category gt Nearest POI Play nametags POI category Previous destination Street address Help NAVIGATION Destination 378 Zoom city Zoom country Zoom minimum MyFord Touch it equipped NAVIGATION Zoom maximum Zoom province Zoom state Zoom street Zoom to lt distance gt Help If you say Destination you can then say any command in the Destination chart One shot Destination Street Address When you say either Navigation destination street address or Destination street address the system asks you to say the full address The system displays an example on screen You can then speak the address naturally such as One two three four Main Street Anytown 379 Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your authorized dealer or visit our online store
17. 138 Four Wheel Drive Principle of Operation 140 Using Four Wheel Drive 140 Brakes General Information 145 Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Brake S aeaea EEEE AREARE 145 Parking Brake 146 Hill Start Assist 146 Traction Control Principle of Operation 147 Using Traction Control 147 Stability Control Principle of Operation Using Stability Control Parking Aids Parking Aid 150 Active Park Assist 152 Rear View Camera 156 Cruise Control Principle of Operation 159 Using Cruise Control Driving Aids Blind Spot Monitor Eco Mode Steering Load Carrying Rear Under Floor Storage Luggage Covers 22166 Roof Racks and Load Carriers 267 Load Sloat EREET 168 Towing Towing a Trailer 176 Trailer Sway Control 177 Recommended Towing Weights 177 Essential Towing Checks 179 TOWING POMS rs nether nani 181 Transporting the Vehicle 181 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 182 Driving Hints Breaking In ss Economical Driving Driving Through Water Floor Mats Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance Hazard Warning Flashers EU ESAUIORES Rene Jump Starting the Vehicle Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need 190 In California U S Only 191 The Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program U S Only 192
18. 411 four one one 911 nine one one 700 seven hundred 800 eight hundred 900 nine hundred Pound Number lt 0 9 gt Asterisk Clear deletes all entered digits n2 Phone book lt name gt at home n2 Phone book lt name gt at office Phone book lt name gt at work Phone book lt name gt on mobile OR cell n2 Phone book lt name gt on other This command does not require you to say Phone first This command is not available until phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth See Dial table below See Menu table below Phone book commands When you ask SYNC to access things suchas a phonebook name or number the requested information appears in the display to view Press the phone button and say Call to call the contact 292 Delete deletes one digit Plus Star Note 70 exit dial mode press and hold the phone button or press MENU to go to the phone menu MENU Phone connections Phone settings message notification off Phone settings message notification on Phone settings set phone ringer Phone settings set ringer 1 Phone settings set ringer 2 Phone settings set ringer 3 Phone settings set ringer off Battery Phone name SYNCTM MENU Sig
19. C guide sleeve adjust and unlock button D guide sleeve unlock and remove button E fold button Adjusting the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Pull the head restraint up Lowering the Head Restraint 1 Press and hold button C 2 Push the head restraint down Removing the Head Restraint 1 Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position 2 Press and hold buttons C and D 3 Pull the head restraint up Seats Installing the Head Restraint Moving the Seat Backward and Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves Forward and push the head restraint down until it locks Folding the Head Restraint 1 Press and hold button E 2 Pullit back up to reset Tilting Head Restraints The front head restraints have a tilting feature for extra comfort To tilt the head restraint do the following T oy E163870 paies WARNING Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged Adjusting the Height of the Driver s Seat E144727 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position 2 Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position After the head restraint reaches the forward most tilt position pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward un tilted position MANUAL SEATS WARNING Do not adjust the driver s seat or seat back when your vehicle is moving M
20. See Clearing All MyKeys page 50 Follow Steps 1 3 After clearing your MyKeys you can create anew MyKey See Creating a MyKey page 50 Note For vehicles with Intelligent Access Keys Push button Start you cannot program the remote start system as a MyKey Always treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key Condition Potential Causes cannot create a MyKey 52 The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the only admin key there always has to be at least one admin key Vehicles with push button start The intelli gent access key fob is not positioned correctly next to the steering column See Keyless Starting page 123 MyKeyTM Condition Potential Causes SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 cannot program the configurable settings The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey page 50 The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 cannot clear the MyKeys The key or fob used to start
21. The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it 318 Review the media voice commandsat the beginning of the media section Say the song or artist exactly as listed If you say Play Artist Prince the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation Make sure you are saying the complete title such as California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles If the song titles are in all CAPS you have to spell them LOLA requires you to say L O L A SYNCTM Voice command issues Possible cause s Possible solution s Do not use special charac ters in the title The system does not recognize them SYNC does not understand oris calling the wrong contact when want to make a call You may be using the wrong voice commands You may be saying the name differently than the way you Saved it Contacts in your phone book may be very short and similar or they may contain special characters Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS Review the Phone voice commandsat the beginning of the phone section Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are listed For example if you save a contact as Joe Wilson say Call Joe Wilson The system works better if you list full names such as Joe Wilson rather than Joe Do not use special charac ters such as 123 or ICE as th
22. and conditions which are agreed to by you on the one hand and NAVTEQ North America LLC NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers on the other hand The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada Queen s Printer for Ontario Canada Post Corporation GeoBase NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service to publish and sell ZIP 4 information United States Postal Service 2009 Prices are not established controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS United States Postal Service USPS and ZIP 4 The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de Estadistica y Geografia TERMS AND CONDITIONS License Limitations on Use You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal noncommercial purposes and not for service bureau timesharing or other similar purposes Except as otherwise set forth herein you agree not to otherwise 392 reproduce copy modify decompile disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data and may not transfer or distribute it in any form for any purpose except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws License Limitations on Transfer Your limited license do
23. gt a oe eB E142547 gt Four wheel drive vehicles front tires on the left side of the diagram e m N EB m E142548 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and cables If you need to use cables it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as cables may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices Wheels and Tires If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions Use 10 mm cables or chains only on front axle with 235 55R17 tires Not all S class snow chains or cables meet these restrictions Chains of this size restriction will include a tensioning device
24. i icon buttons on your steering wheel controls Note Your system is equipped witha feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition off and no doors open PHONE Press to select any of the following Phone Quick Dial Phonebook History Messaging Settings NAVIGATION Press to select any of the following My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Street Address Intersection City Center Map Edit Route Cancel Route CLIMATE Press to select any of the following Driver Settings Recirculated Air Auto Dual Passenger Settings A C Defrost SETTINGS Press to select any of the following Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help HOME Press to access your home screen Depending on your vehicle s option package and software your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section Your features may also be limited depending on your market Check with an authorized dealer for availability INFORMATION t Press to select any of the following Services Travel Link Alerts Calendar Apps ENTERTAINMENT MyFord Touch f Equipped Press to select any of the following AM FM SIRIUS CD USB BT Stereo SD Card A V In Using the Touch Sensitive Controls on Your System To turn a feature on and off just touch the graphic with your finger To get the best performance from the touch sensitive con
25. www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note This receiver includes the eCos real time operating system eCos is published under the eCos License Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN touch the bottom left corner of the touchscreen Touch SIRIUS gt Options MyFord Touch it equipped SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal interfer ence Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute Troubleshooting tips Radio display Cause Action Acquiring Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel No action required This message
26. 5 6 50 mph 80 km h The instrument cluster will display the selected gear that you are currently in and a shift indicator arrow to assist in optimizing shifting SelectShift will automatically make some shifts for you in the event that your engine speed is running at too high or to low an RPM Note Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting 137 Manual Shifting in D Drive If Equipped The transmission can be manually controlled temporarily when in D Drive by using the buttons on the gearshift lever The system will determine when temporary manual control is no longer desired and will revert back to automatic control Move the shifter to the S sport position for extensive manual control Brake Shift Interlock WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working When doing this procedure you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure Use wheel chocks if appropriate If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Use the brake shift interlock lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position inthe event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead batter
27. ESP Ford Extended Service Plan ESP 397 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information 400 Normal Scheduled Maintenance 403 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance 406 Scheduled Maintenance Record 408 Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual The more that you know about it the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution When using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models sometimes even before they are generally available It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle Note Some of theillustrations in this manual may be used for different models so may appear different to you on your vehicle However the essential information in the illustrations is always correct Note Alw
28. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Child Seats E142594 Use achild safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat for infants toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds 18 kilograms or less generally age four or younger Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child ina child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Use the correct safety
29. Map Icons A Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle It stays in the center of the map display except when in scroll mode 376 Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map the fixed icon is in the center of the screen The map position closest to the cursor is in a window on the top center part of the screen Address book entry default gt icon s indicates the location on the map of an address book entry This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map You can select from any of the 22 icons available You can use each icon more than once lt Home indicates the location on i the map currently stored as the LE home position You can only save one address from the Address Book as your Home entry You cannot change this icon POI Point Of Interest icons indicate locations of any point of interest categories you choose to display on the map You can choose to display three point of interest categories on the map at one time Starting point indicates the S starting point of a planned route Waypoint indicates the location of a waypoint on the map The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route list t Destination symbol indicates the l ending point of a planned route Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on the
30. Map mode later in this chapter Setting a Destination Press the green corner of your touchscreen then the Dest button when it appears Choose any of the following Destination My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Street Address Intersection City Center Map Edit Route Cancel Route MyFord Touch i equipped 1 Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields in any order For address destination entry the Go button appears once you enter all the necessary information Pressing the Go button makes the address location appear on the map If you choose Previous Destination the last 20 destinations you have selected appear Select Set as Dest to make this your destination You can also choose to set this as a waypoint have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination or save it as a favorite The system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation Choose from up to three different types of routes and then select Start Route Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible Eco Route Uses the most fuel efficient route You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways tollroads ferries and car trains as well as to use or not
31. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notific ation On and Message Notification Off 2 Press OK to select Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phonebook such as add delete or download Press OK to choose between Add Contacts Press OK to add more contacts from your phone book Push the desired contact s on your phone See your phone s manual on how to push contacts Delete Phonebook Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history When Delete Phonebook appears press OK to confirm SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settings menu Download Phonebook Press OK to select then and press OK again when Confirm Download appears Auto Download Automatically download your phone book each time your phone connects to SYNC Press OK to select When Auto Download On appears press OK to have your phonebook automatically down loaded each time Select Off if you do not want to download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC Your phonebook callhistory and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC Return Exit the current menu Downloading times are phone dependent and quantity dependent When Auto Download is on it automatically deletes any changes additions or deletions saved since your last download System Settings This menu provides access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu feat
32. Previous song A V Inputs WARNINGS Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving Store the portable music player ina secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is moving Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving 352 D E142622 Your A V inputs allow you to connect an auxiliary audio video source such as a gaming systems or apersonal camcorder by connecting RCA cords not included to these input jacks The jacks are yellow red and white and are located either behind a small access door on the instrument panelor in your center console You can also use the A V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play
33. The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the front axle Do not use chains or cables on 235 50R18 and 235 45R19 tires Install cables securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer whichever is less Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle stop and retighten them If this does not work remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage Remove the cables when they are no longer needed Do not use cables on dry roads If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables please contact your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
34. Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program Canada Only 192 Getting Assistance Outside the U S and CANAL mens 193 Ordering Additional Owner s LiT rATUrE mms 194 Reporting Safety Defects U S ONLY nes 194 Reporting Safety Defects Canada Sa E 195 Table of Contents Fuses Changing A FUSE 196 Fuse Specification Chart 197 Maintenance General Information 206 Opening and Closing the Hood 206 Under Hood Overview 1 6L EGOBOOSEMM stresse 208 Under Hood Overview 2 0L COBOOSEM 2 E Under Hood Overview 2 5L Engine Oil Dipstick 1 6L ECOBOOSt nr nemememugius 21 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 0L ECOBQOSU Y 2 Di rene 211 Engine Oil Check 211 Engine Coolant Check 212 Automatic Transmission Fluid CHO CK iscsi ncecstiecscetacciatctawtinnts 215 Brake Fluid Check 5 Power Steering Fluid Check 215 Fuel Filtet a 216 Washer Fluid ChECK 216 Changing the 12V Battery 216 Checking the Wiper Blades 218 Changing the Wiper Blades 218 Changing the Engine Air Filter 219 Adjusting the Headlamps 220 Removing a Headlamp 222 Changing a BUILD 222 Bulb Specification Chart 226 Vehicle Care General Information 227 Cleaning Products 227 Cleaning the Exterior 227 Repairing Minor Paint Damage VARIE nee ete Cleaning the Engine 229 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Bl deS eeaeee aiaei a 229 Cleaning the Inte
35. and cooled devices during hot weather Seats SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash Do not place objects higher than the seat back to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking Max 30 E68595 When you use them properly the seat head restraint safety belt and air bags will provide optimum protection in the event of acrash We recommend that you follow these guidelines Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible Make sure that you remain comfortable Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel We recommend a minimum of 10 inches 25 centimeters between your breastbone and the air bag cover Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Bend your legs slightly so that you
36. could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time Note Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergents Note f you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish To maintain their condition we recommend that you Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Apply using manufacturer s instructions Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover Vehicle Care VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place Protect from
37. it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the following indicators on your screen E142616 The HD Radio logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid when digital audio is playing When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen 339 The multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HDI signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on To turn the feature on and use it 1 Press AM or FM gt Options gt TAG Button gt On When you hear a song you like touch TAG The system automatically saves the song s information and transfers it to your portable music player if supported when y
38. loss of brake and steering assistance The steering will not lock but higher effort will be required When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators may also be off Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop 2 When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the key to position o 3 Apply the parking brake Vehicles with Keyless Start 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop 2 When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P 3 Press and hold the button for one second or press it three times within two seconds 4 Apply the parking brake Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and the leave the engine idling for long periods of time we recommend that you do one of the following Open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 centimeters Set your climate control to outside air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
39. map scales but shows the map in North uponly If the scale returns below this level the system restores Heading up North up 2D map always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen MyFord Touch 1fEquipped 3D map mode provides an A elevated perspective of the map This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by touching the map twice and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map View switches between full map street list and exit view in route guidance Menu displays a pop up box that allows direct access to navigation settings View Edit Route SIRIUS Travel Link Guidance Mute and Cancel Route this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle s current location Re center the map by pressing Auto Zoom Press the green bar to access map mode then select the or zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen When you press Auto Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed The slower your vehicle is traveling the farther inthe map zooms in the faster your vehicle is traveling the farther the map zooms out To turn the feature off just press the or button again In 3D mode rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the shaded bar with the arrows
40. planned route MyFord Touch it equipped No GPS symbol indicates that CxS insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate map positioning This icon may display under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access Quick touch Buttons When in map mode touch anywhere on the map display to access the following options Set as Dest Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as your destination You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display When you reach the desired location simply let go and then touch Set as Dest Set as Waypoint Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint Save to Favorites Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites POI Icons Touch this button to select icons to display on the map You can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same time Turn these ON or OFF Cancel Route Touch this button to cancel the active route View Edit Route Access these features when a route is active View Route Edit Destination Waypoints 377 Edit Turn List Detour Edit Route Preferences Edit Traffic Preferences Cancel Route Nokia is the digital map provider for the navigation application If you find map data errors you may report them directly to Nokia by going to http mapreporter navteg com Nokia evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of the
41. unintentionally Intelligent Access if equipped The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle You press the luggage compartment button You press a button on the transmitter If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low you may need to mechanically unlock your door You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation See Remote Control page 44 REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters If Equipped E142585 Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle The transmitter portion functions as the remote control Keys and Remote Controls BNA 13 80 ZONE ONE iOSIAV 7700009090693 O 7700003090 01004 VY L09AS LPL X80 L CAUTION TOBERENOED BY OUSTOVER ONL E138615 Note Your vehicle s keys came witha security label that provides important vehicle key cut information Keep the label in a safe place for future reference Intelligent Access Key i Equipped Note A three button remote contro will operate similarly E138616 Your i
42. 178 Towing ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines for safe towing Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles 1600 kilometers Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer See your scheduled maintenance information If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions the rental agency gives yOu Another chapter of this manual contains load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and instructions on calculating your vehicle s load See Load Limit page 168 Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle Distribute the trailer load so 10 15 of the total trailer weight is on the tongue Safety Chains Note Never attach safety chains to the bumper Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch To connect the safety chains cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your ve
43. 349F 379C Note For best results coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300 ROB75240 available from your authorized dealer Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside ofits specified function and vehicle location Adding Engine Coolant WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield Maintenance WARNINGS To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark Note Do not use stop leak pellets cooling system sealants or additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty Note During normal vehicle operation the engine coolant may
44. 6 Door latch hood latch auxiliary Not applicable Multi Purpose Grease lithium XG 4 or XL 5 or equi valent ESB M1C93 rating and Lock hood latch trunk grease B latch seat tracks Lock cylinder Not applicable Motorcraft Penet XL 1 None AWD fluid 80W 90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Lubricant Automatic trans 9 0 qt 8 5L XT 11 QDC WSD M2C200 D mission fluid Rear differential 2 4 pt 115 L Motorcraft SAE XY 80W90 QL WSP M2C197 A Power transfer unit PTU fluid 18 fl oz 0 53 L Motorcraft SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY 75W140 QL WSL M2C192 A Engine coolant 2 5L AWD Engine oil 2 0L 5 7 qt 5 4 L Motorcraft SAE 5W WSS M2C946 A EcoBoost 30 Motor Oil or equi valent Engine oil 1 6L 4 3 qt 4 1L Motorcraft SAE 5W WSS M2C945 A EcoBoost 20 Motor Oil or equi valent Engine oil 2 5L 5 7 qt 5 4 L 5 6 Engine coolant 9 7 qt 9 2 L Motorcraft Orange VC 3DIL B U S 2 0L EcoBoost Antifreeze Coolant CVC 3DIL B Prediluted Canada Engine coolant 8 5 qt 8 L WSS M97B44 D2 1 6L EcoBoost 9 2 qt 8 7 L 265 Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Ford part name or equivalent Ford part number Ford specification Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates U S Premium Quality Windshield Washer
45. 6 5 ft 2 m from the parking space The vehicle is closer than 16 in 40 cm from neighboring parked vehicles The transmission is in R Reverse the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission i e rolling forward when R Reverse is selected The transmission is in R Reverse the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly i e not inflated correctly improper size or of different sizes A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities 155 Parking Aids The system does not position the vehicle where want in the space A parked vehicle has a high attachment i e salt sprayer snowplow moving truck bed etc The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly i e driving from a heated garage into the cold or after leaving a car wash
46. 6L ECOBOOST A B gt yp E146020 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 2 0L ECOBOOST 7 2 5L Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks 1 Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean lint free cloth Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level If the level is at the MIN mark add oil immediately Adding Engine Oil Note Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running Note Do not add oil further than the MAX mark Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage E142462 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL CHECK Note Check the level before starting the engine E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers Maintenance 1 Remove the filler cap Add engine oil that meets the Ford specifications See Capacities and Specifications page 261 Replace the filler cap Turn it until you feel a strong resistance Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring System Note Reset the oil life monitoring only after
47. 8000 kilometers from your last oil change Never exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between oil change intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information 401 We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized re manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle Additives and Chemicals This owner s manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle s normal maintenance Please consult your warranty information Oils Fluids and Flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
48. 81 130 N 87 140 Q 99 159 R 106 171 S 112 180 T 118 190 U 124 200 H 130 210 V 149 240 Wheels and Tires Letter Speedrating mph rating km h W 168 270 Y 186 299 Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR H U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 240 J Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyest
49. 9 107 9 gt FM 2 EM lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt FM 2 preset lt gt FM autoset HD lt gt FM autoset preset lt gt Preset lt gt EM preset lt gt Radio off FM 1 Radio on FM 1 preset lt gt Set PTY EM 2 FM 2 preset lt gt MyFord Touch it equipped TUNE HD lt gt Preset lt gt Help If available SIRIUS Satellite Radio If Activated Press the lower left corner of the D touchscreen and then select the SIRIUS tab Memory Presets Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel Sound returns when finished ALERT Save the current song artist or team as a favorite The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel Replay Replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station Changing stations erases the previous audio While in replay mode Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the current track Press play or pause to play or pause the audio Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the feature to replay audio Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels Options T
50. Audio Browsing Device Content SD Card Slot and USB Port SIRIUS Satellite Radio If Activated rurale 343 Supported Media Players Formats and Metadata Information Essential Towing Checks Before Towing a Trailer Hitches Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Trailer Lamps When Towing a Trailer Event Data Recording See Data Recording 9 Export Unique Options 13 Exterior Mirrors Blind Spot Monitor Fold Away Exterior Mirrors Heated Exterior Mirrors Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors Memory Mirrors Power Exterior Mirrors F Fastening the Safety Belts 27 How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear Outboard Positions Restraint of Pregnant Women Safety Belt Extension Assembly 29 Safety Belt Locking Modes 2 Floor MatS rimes Fog Lamps Front See Front FOS Lamps n 75 Ford Credit U S Only Ford Extended Service Plan ESP SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY SERVICE PLANS U S Only Four Wheel Drive Principle of Operation Front FOS LAMPS Front Passenger Sensing System iar Fuel and Refueling 128 Fuel Consumption 134 Calculating Fuel Economy Fil Fue Fuel Quality Choosing the Right Fuel Octane Recommendations Fue Fuse Specificati Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel 203 Passenger Compartment Fuse Power
51. Audio Settings Spd Comp Vol Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between O and 7 Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble Middle Bass Fade and Balance Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position RBDS RDS Text Select to view additional broadcast data if available This feature defaults to off RBDS must be on for you to set a category DSP Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for amore consistent listening level 278 Audio System Clock Settings Set Time Select to set the time Set Date Select to set the calendar date 24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12 hour mode or 24 hour mode Display Settings Dimming Select to change display brightness Language Select to display the language in English French or Spanish Temp setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius DIGITAL AUDIO Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts wh
52. FREQUENCIES This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range weather conditions nearby radio towers structures around the vehicle other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions for example amateur radios medical equipment wireless headphones remote controls and alarm systems If the frequencies are jammed you will not be able to use your remote control You can lock and unlock the doors with the key Note Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended Note f you are in range the remote control will operate if you press any button
53. Fluid Canada ZC 32 A U S CXC 37 A B D and F Canada WSB M8B16 A2 Fuel tank 15 4 gal 58 5L Not applicable Not applicable Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS M6C65 A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6 Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause brake system damage Approximate dry fill capacity Actual amount may vary during fluid changes Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling our engine has been designed to use Motorcraft engine oils or equivalent oils that meet Ford specifications It is also acceptable to use an engine oil of recommended viscosity grade that meets API SN requirements and displays the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines Do not use supplemental engine oil additives in your engine They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford s warranty Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle 266 Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM
54. GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Gw E143818 GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight plus cargo plus passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo It is shown on the Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating Note For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer EN Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The Gross Vehicle Weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Load Carrying Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXKG XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX RIM XXX RIMS AT XXX KPaXX PSLGOLD AT Mk eux PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE
55. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Vertical Aim Adjustment utomatic Adjusting the Steering Wheel 66 Transm SSO Naisissa tarinaan 36 Airbag DiISposal 43 Understanding the Positions of Your Air Conditioning Automatic Transmission See Climate Control 101 Automatic Transmission Flui Alarm Ch CK Rennes See Anti Theft Alarm 65 AUtOWPE S e Ambient LERNE reenen 77 AUXiliary Input Jack Anti Theft Alarm 65 Auxiliary Power Points i Arming the Alarm 65 110 Volt AC Power Point 12 Volt DC Power Point POC ONS irii onani eevee ose Disarming the Alarm Appendices 415 Index B Blind Spot Monitor 160 Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert 160 Bonnet Lock See Opening and Closing the Hood 206 Booster Seats K Types of Booster Seats 17 Brake Fluid Check 215 Brakes 145 General Information 145 Breaking In 183 Bulb Specification Chart 226 Cabin Alt Filter California Proposition 65 Capacities and Specifications Technical Specifications Car Wash See Cleaning the Exterior 227 Center Console 122 Changing a Bulb 222 Lamp Assembly Condensation 00 222 Replacing Fog Park and Turn Signal Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly si Replacing Side Marker BUulbs 224 Replacing Tail Brake and Turn Signal B D Sescadsenisccticcrac
56. LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
57. Manual Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision but accidents do happen Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit finish structural integrity corrosion protection and dent resistance During vehicle development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to Use genuine Ford replacement collision parts Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty For additional information refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner s Manual Special Instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNINGS Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury See Supplementary Restraints System page 35 Front
58. OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO we TINTTR TPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX XX X XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX_ XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX E142523 MFD BY FORD MOTOR C C0 DATE xx xx GIWR PNBV 200X LB00x AT A kPa PSI LPC xxx xx COLD A FROID n VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MELEES TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 00x 200x jug TINTTR TTP PS TR TAXLE TTR ISPR XXXXX xx X XX X XXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX VXXXX XXXXXXX XX E142524 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 172 Load Carrying E143819 GCW Gross Combined Weight is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus DEN of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating isthe maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating not at Gross Combined Weight Rating Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehic
59. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations so to that extent the above may not apply to you Export Control You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws rules and regulations including but not limited to the laws rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U S Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U S Department of Commerce To the extent that any such export laws rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with
60. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury froma deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Airbags can kill or injure a child ina child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat inthe front seat move the seat all the way back Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in serious injury If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced
61. Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings Customer Assistance In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact our Customer Relationship Center The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effecti
62. SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE SOME STATES AND OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara California The arbitrator shall apply the 390 Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara California The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Intern
63. Safety Belts How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode E142591 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode 2 How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and turn on the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear Outboard Positions Safety belts in the rear outboard positions can lock if the seatback is returned firmly to its upright position You can unlock the safety belts using the following procedures For vehicles where the rear seats recline 1 Recline the seat to its full rear recline position 2 The safety belt should then unlock 29 3 Return the seatback to its desired upright position For vehicles with rear seats that do not recline or are locked with the seat in its full rear recline position 1 Grasp the safety belt webbing at the top of the seatback Pull the safety belt webbing forward firmly After pulling the safety belt forward allow the safety belt to feed back into the safety belt retractor as much as possible If necessary press the seatback down to allow the safety belt
64. Use the recessed notched portion of the cover Screw in the recovery hook 2 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Switch the ignition to the on position Failure to do so results in steering lock and non function of indicator and brake lamps Braking and steering efforts are high if the engine is not running Maintain increased stopping distances TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE E143886 If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are amember of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly or by any other means Towing Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle It is acceptable to have your front wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground When towing in this manner the rear wheels can remain on the ground Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment This prevents damage to the t
65. What s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request Playing Video from Your Device To access and play video from your device your vehicle s transmission must be in position P with the ignition in accessory mode See Starting and Stopping the Engine page 123 MyFord Touch 1fEquipped SD Card and USB Voice Commands If you are listening to a USB ns device or an SD card press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card press the voice button and after the tone say USB or SD card then any of the following commands USB or SD CARD USB or SD CARD Play TV show lt name gt Play TV show episode lt name gt Play video lt name gt Play video podcast lt name gt Play video podcast episode lt name gt Play video playlist lt name gt Browse Next Pause Play Play album lt name gt Play all Play artist lt name gt Play audiobook lt name gt Play author lt name gt Play composer lt name gt Play folder lt name gt Play genre lt name gt Play movie lt name gt Play music video lt name gt Previous Repeat all
66. a message will be displayed for approximately five seconds Note f a warning message appears in the information display when using the spare tire it should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced road tire and you switch the ignition on 140 Note t is recommended that you reinstall the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause system damage or default the system to front wheel drive The system gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities Operating your vehicle in conditions other than moderate sand snow mud or rough roads could subject it to excessive stress and heat which could result in system damage This will not be covered by your vehicle warranty E142669 A graphic will be displayed in the information display to advise you of the power distribution between the front and rear wheels The more the area is filled the more power is being distributed to that wheel Driving in Special Conditions With Four Wheel Drive Four wheel drive vehicles are suitable for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the freeway Note t may be useful to switch Traction control off This allows for more wheel spin and engine torque in certain off road conditions or if your vehicle becomes stuck Four Wheel
67. age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serious injury or death WARNINGS Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury Never place or allow achild to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash To avoid risk of injury do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle Restraint Combined Use any attachment method as indicated below by X type weight of childand LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt child lower lower andtop andLATCH only restraint anchors anchors tether lower seat and top only anchor anchors tether and top anchor tether anchor Rear facing Up to 65 lb x x child seat 29 5 kg Rear facing Over 65 lb x child seat 29 5 kg Forward Upto65lb x x x facing 29 5 kg child seat Forward Over 65 lb x x facing 29 5 kg child
68. an oil change 1 Turn the ignition key to the on position Do not start the engine For vehicles with push button start press and hold the start button for two seconds without pressing the brake pedal Do not attempt to start the engine 2 Press both the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time 3 Keep both pedals fully pressed 4 After three seconds the Service Oil reset in prog message will be displayed After 25 seconds the Service Oil reset complete message will be displayed 6 Release both the accelerator and brake pedals 7 The Service Oil reset complete message will no longer be displayed Rotate the key to the off position For vehicles with push button start press the start button to turn the vehicle off completely ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Checking the Engine Coolant When the engine is cold check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 212 Note Vake sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir Note Coolant expands when it is hot The level may extend beyond the MAX mark Note f the level is at the MIN mark below the MIN mark or empty add coolant immediately See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48 to 50 which equates to a freeze point between 30 F 349C and
69. are not in the proximity of the roof opening The moonroof and sunscreen controls are located on the overhead console The moonroof and sunscreen have a one touch open and close feature To stop them during one touch operation press the control a second time Windows and Mirrors Opening and Closing the Press and hold the front of the control Sunscreen within two seconds of a bounce back event to override this function While bounce back is active the closing force increases for each of the next three times that you close the moonroof Venting the Moonroof Press and release the front of the control to vent the moonroof Press and release E138668 the rear of the control to close the moonroof Press and release the rear of the control to open the sunscreen Press and release the front of the control to close the sunscreen If it is open the moonroof will automatically close before the sunscreen closes Opening and Closing the Moonroof E138669 Press and release the rear of the control to open the moonroof If it is closed the sunscreen will automatically open before the moonroof opens The moonroof will stop short of the fully opened position Note This position helps to reduce wind noise or rumbling which may happen with the moonroof fully open Press and hold the control again to fully open the moonroof Press and release the front of the control to close the moonroof Bounce Back The moonro
70. areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you Press Add to program an entry Once you make a selection the system tries to avoid the area s if possible for all routes To delete a selection choose the listing on the screen When the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen Map Mode Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks when available 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe These maps also contain features such as town blocks building footprints and railways 3D landmarks appear as clear visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only Coverage varies and improves with updated map releases E162051 Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in the upper left corner of the screen It toggles between three different map modes Heading up North up and 3D Heading up 2D map always P shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen This view is available for map scales up to 2 5 miles 4 kilometers The system remembers this setting for larger
71. automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents The system automatically provides outside air to reduce window fogging Press again to turn off defrost mode Instrument panel Press to distribute air through the instrument panel vents Press again to turn off panel mode Floor Distributes air through the demister vents and front and rear seat floor vents Press again to turn off floor mode A C Press to turn air conditioning on or off Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Air conditioning also engages automatically in some modes Single Zone Temperature Control In this mode the climate control system links the temperature settings for both the driver s side and passenger s side If you adjust the setting using the rotary control on the driver s side the system adjusts the temperature to the same setting on the passenger s side Dual Zone Temperature Control Select a temperature for the passenger s side using the rotary control on the passenger s side Single zone temperature control automatically switches off The 60 F 15 5 C and 85 F 29 5 C in steps of 19 F 0 5 C In position LO 59 F 15 C the system switches to permanent cooling In position HI 86 F 30 C the system switches to permanent heating temperature on the driver s side remains unchan
72. below 177 Note Be sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area Do not exceed 20 feet 1 86 meters if your vehicle is not equipped with a towing package or 30 feet 2 79 meters if your vehicle is equipped with a towing package Note For high altitude operation reduce the gross combined weight by 2 per 1000 feet 300 meters starting at the 1000 foot 300 meter elevation point Note Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight as the vehicle s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes Your vehicle may tow a Class or Il trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart Towing Powertrain MaximumGCWR lb Maximum Trailer kg Weight lb kg 2 5L 2WD 5351 2427 1500 681 1 6L GTDI 2WD 5862 2659 2000 907 2 OL GTDI 2WD 5957 2702 2000 907 1 6L GTDI 4WD 6005 2724 2000 907 2 OL GTDI 4WD 6091 2763 2000 907 2 0L GTDI 2WD 7457 3382 3500 1588 2 0L GTDI 4WD 7591 3443 3500 1588 Calculated with SAE J2807 method Without trailer towing package With trailer towing package
73. change color from orange to pink or light red As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained the system to be flushed or the engine coolant to be replaced 213 Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Use prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications page 261 In case of emergency a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush and refilled with prediluted engine coolant as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant Unscrew the cap slow
74. cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended Using other non recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts Use only approved products to clean plastic parts For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color 228 Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips Always read the instructions before using the products WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car s paint from the elements We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year When washing and waxing park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight Always wash your vehicle before applying wax Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives Follow the manufacturer s instructions to apply and remove the wax Apply a sm
75. contains valuable information such as Vehicle diagnostic information Scheduled maintenance Open recalls and Field Service Actions Items noted during vehicle inspections by an authorized dealer that still need servicing You can run a report after your vehicle has been running a minimum of 60 seconds by pressing the voice button and saying Vehicle health report or pressing the phone button To run a report using the phone button SYNCTM menu then press OK Press the phone button to enter phone 3 Scroll to select from the following options Scroll to select Vehicle Health and Vehicle health report options User Preferences Press OK to select and enter the menu Scroll to select from Automatic Reports Press OK to and select On or Off Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a health report at certain mileage intervals Mileage Intervals Press OK Scroll to select between 5000 7500 or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make your selection Return Press OK to exit the menu Run Report Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle s diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information open recalls and other field service actions and vehicle inspec dealer tion items that still need servicing from an authorized You must first turn this feature on before you can select the de
76. corrects or clears after a key cycle 162 A LE The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle Do not allow these areas to become obstructed by mud snow or bumper stickers as this can cause degraded system performance If the system detects a degraded performance condition amessage warning of a blocked sensor or a message warning of low visibility will appear in the information display along with a warning indicator The information display warning can be cleared but the warning indicator will remain illuminated When the blockage is removed the system can be reset in two ways whenat least two objects are detected while driving or turn the ignition from on to off then back on If the blockage is still present after the key cycle the system senses again that it is blocked after driving in traffic E142443 Driving Aids Reasons for messages being displayed The radar Clean the fascia area in surface is front ofthe radar or remove dirty or the obstruction obstructed The radar Drive normally in traffic for surfaceis afew minutes to allow the not dirty or radar to detect passing obstructed vehicles so it can clear the blocked state Heavyrain No action required The fall snow system automatically fall inter resets to an unblocked feres with state once the rainfall or the radar snowfall rate decreases or signals st
77. could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada Transport Canada Contact Information Website http www te gc ca eng roadsafety menu htm Phone 1 800 333 0510 195 Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire E142430 If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color Color Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard Maxi fuses Cartridge Fuse link fuses maxi fuses cartridge 2A Grey Grey 3A Violet Violet 4A Pink Pink 5A Tan Tan 7 5A Brown Brown 7 10A Red Red 15A Blue Blue 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural Natural Natural 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A Orange Green Green 50A Red Red Red 60A Blue Yellow Yellow 70A 7 7 Tan Brown 80A Natural Black Black 196 Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Pre Fuse Box The pre fuse box is in the engine compartment attached to the positive battery post This box contains several high curren
78. crossbar by turning them counterclockwise Load Carrying Note f you cannot loosen the thumbwheel with your hand loosen the fastener head You can also use a small screwdriver or similar tool to loosen the thumbwheel by inserting the shaft between the two paddles of the thumbwheel and rotating it loose 2 Remove the crossbar by sliding the ends off of the shoulder bolts in the side rails Move the crossbar to the new side rail position and slide the crossbar onto the shoulder bolt at that position Replace and tighten the thumbwheels at both sides of the crossbar by turning them clockwise until tight You can use a small screwdriver or similar tool to tighten if necessary Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time you add or remove load from the roof rack and periodically while traveling Make sure that the load is secure before traveling LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading with and without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle trailer or both to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your 168 vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label
79. disable this feature The audio system will mute when the front seat occupants safety belts are not fastened Early low fuel The low fuel warning activates earlier giving the MyKey user more time to refuel Driver assist features if equipped on your vehicle are forced on parking aid blind spot information system BLIS with cross traffic alert lane departure warning and forward collision warning system Configurable Settings With an admin key you can configure certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the vehicle You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key A vehicle speed limit can be set Warnings will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise control Vehicle speed minders of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h Once you select a speed it will be shown in the display followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded Audio system maximum volume of 45 A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume Also the speed sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled Always on setting When this is selected you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac if your vehicle is equipped with this feature MyK
80. for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving Acomplete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated FUEL CONSUMPTION Note The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank 134 Empty reserve is the amount of fuel remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty Do not rely on this fuel for driving The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the amount of fuel that can be put into the tank after the gauge indicates empty The advertised capacity is t
81. ford com pr If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Customer Assistance Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number of Kuwait 24810575 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer In the event your inquiry is unresolved communicate your concern with the dealership s Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager If you require additional assistance or clarification please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth Michigan 48170 Attention Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog call toll fr
82. form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate 280 Audio System Potential station issues Cause Action Echo stutter skip or repeat in audio Increase or decrease in audio volume This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster No action required This is a broadcast issue Sound fading or blending in and out The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio No action required The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3 multicast preset or Direct Tune Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or froma The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded Once decoded the audio is avail able The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your No action required This is normal behavior Wait until the audio is available No action required The station is not available in your current location direct tune current reception area Text information does not match currently playing audio Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at website listed below
83. frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting CD and CD Player Information Note CD units play commercially pressed 4 75 inch 12 centimeter audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Note Do not insert CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact an authorized dealer for further information Note Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Always handle discs by their edges only Clea
84. fuel is left in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or ona gradient The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located A low fuel reminder will be triggered when the fuel gauge needle is at 1 16th or vehicles equipped with a DTE Drive To Empty is at 35 miles 60km whichever occurs first WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information Note Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle Airbag Front e If it fails to illuminate when you A start your vehicle continues to flash or remains on it indicates a malfunction Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Instrument Cluster Anti Lock Braking System If it illuminates when you are driving this indicates a malfunction You will continue to have the normal braking system without ABS unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Battery If it illuminates while driving it indicates a malfuncti
85. grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac system activates SLOW DOWN The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction See Using Traction Control page 147 I I I l i 1 j XN lt gt A E72903 A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac with RSC skidding off its intended route B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC maintaining control on a slippery surface Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control RSC The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R You can turn off the traction control portion of the system independently See Using Traction Control page 147 149 Parking Aids PARKING AID iF EQUIPPED WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury please read and understand
86. if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and the system delivers a new route to your vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions See Navigation page 371 MyFord Touch i equipped Disconnecting from SYNC Services button on the steering wheel 1 Press and hold the hang up phone 2 Say Good bye from the SYNC Services main menu SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams such as Detroit Lions or anews category You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services SYNC Services Voice Commands SERVICES Services downlo
87. illuminate when you switch the ignition on or begins to flash at any time have the system checked by your authorized dealer Parking Lamps At will illuminate when you switch 0 0 the parking lamps on Service Engine Soon If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated after the engine is started it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics OBD II system has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system Refer to On Board Diagnostics OBD II in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced See Emission Control System page 132 If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately Note Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M
88. in P Park You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system During all times you are responsible for controlling your vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected the system will be deactivated The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is ona slope without the need to use the parking brake When the system is active your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away ona slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space The system will activate automatically on any slope that will cause significant vehicle rollback Using Hill Start Assist 1 Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed If the sensors detect that your vehicle is ona slope the system will activate automatically Transmission 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds This hold time will automa
89. information display control Note Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional Information Displays Trip 1 and 2 Distance to E Trip odometer Trip timer Digital Speedo Average fuel Ford EcoMode Anticipation Speed Ford EcoMode All Value Distance to E Trip odometer Trip timer and Average fuel See Trip Computer page 90 See Eco Mode page 164 Information Intelligent 4WD MyKey Dist MyKey Info Settings Driver Assist Traction Ctrl On or Off Blind spot On or Off Cross traffic alert On or Off Lighting Rain Light On or Off Dimming Auto or Manual Autolamp delay Off or xx Seconds Display Navigation info Always On or Always Off Language Choose your applicable setting Distance Choose your applicable setting 89 Information Displays Settings Temperature Choose your applicable setting Chimes Park Slot On or Off Convenience Compass Display On or Off Remote Start Climate Control Heater A C Auto or Last Settings Front Defrost Automatic or Off Rear Defrost Automatic or Off Duration 5 10 or 15 minutes Quiet Start On Off Restore Default System Enable or Disable MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey Traction Ctrl Always On or User Selectable Max Speed 80 MPH 130 km h or Off Speed Warning 45 mph 75
90. is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided 2011 NAVTEQ All rights reserved If the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data Wi Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 2013 JiWire Gracenote Copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement EULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote Appendices The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music rela
91. it Equipped Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral Disengage overdrive or move the transmission selector lever to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer your vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brake pedal Driving on Snow and Ice WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of aloss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage Four wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting f
92. km h 55 mph 90 km h 65 mph 105 km h or Off Volume Limiter On or Off Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment TRIP COMPUTER Resetting the Trip Computer options andcurrent vehicle status Use the Press and hold OK on the current screen up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list to reset the respective trip distance time and average fuel information 90 Information Displays Distance to E Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary Trip Odometer Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys Trip Timer Registers the time of individual journeys Average Fuel Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset All Value Indicates all the respective remaining fuel distance time and average fuel information INFORMATION MESSAGES Note Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle not all of the messages will display or be available Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have E130248 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time C
93. message appears in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on Front Sensing System The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other than P Park or N Neutral andthe vehicle speed is below 6 mph 10 km h 15 E130382 A Coverage area of up to 27 inches 70 centimeters from the front of the vehicle and about 14 inches 35 centimeters to the side of the front end of the vehicle Refer to the reverse sensing section for details on coverage area The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either bumper in the following manner Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high pitched tone from the front radio speakers Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear radio speakers The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front or rear of the vehicle For example if an obstacle is 24 inches 60 centimeters from the front of the vehicle and at the same time an obstacle is only 16 inches 40 centimeters from the rear of the vehicle the lower pitched tone sounds An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches 25 centimeters Parking Aids For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system refer to that section Puja OFF E14
94. not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips You can clean the windows with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner You can clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Note Do not use sharp objects such as a razorblade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as this may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s
95. of the right hand portion of the beam pattern If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line the headlamp will need to be adjusted Maintenance E142467 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to aim the headlamp The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps Vehicles With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height Note 7o see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 3 Turnon the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood E142466 4 Thereisa distinct cut off change from light to dark in the left portion of the beam pattern The top edge of this cut off should be positioned two inches 5 centimeters below the horizontal reference line E142467 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order
96. or blending in and out The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio No action required The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3 multicast preset or Direct Tune Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or froma The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded Once decoded the audio is avail able The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your No action required This is normal behavior Wait until the audio is available No action required The station is not available in your current location direct tune current reception area Text information does not match currently playing audio Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at website listed below There is no text information shown for currently selected frequency Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at website listed below HD2 HD7 stations not found when Sean is pressed Pressing Sean disables HD2 HD7 channel search No action required This is normal behavior Attp www ibiquity com automotive report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and
97. park assist are active Wi Fi and Wireless Ed ing wireless settings it Edit ing the list of wireless networks Videos Photos and Graphics Playing video Text Messages Editing the screen s wallpaper or adding new wallpaper Composing text messages Viewing received text messages Editing preset text messages Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination Demo navigation route Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas E The cellular profile media device index Privacy Information and development log remain in your When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle
98. party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components then the terms of this EULA shall apply If MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided then the terms of this EULA shall apply except that the MS Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component s shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component s FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE Appendices Links to Third Party Sites The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE The third party sites are not under the control of MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for i the contents of any third party sites any links contained in third party sites or any changes or updates to third party sites or ii webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites If the SOFTWARE provides li
99. payload weight Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual See Load Limit page 168 You can also find the information in the RV amp Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer Towing TRAILER SWAY CONTROL ir EQUIPPED WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental such as hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation Note This feature does not prevent trailer sway but reduces it once it begins Note This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying Note n some cases if vehicle speed is too high the system may activate multiple times gradually reducing vehicle speed This feature applies the vehicle brakes at individual wheels and if necessary reduces engine power If the trailer begins to sway the stability control light flashes The first thing to do is slow the vehicle down then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution See Load Carrying page 166 RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart
100. posted as regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended 1 6L and 2 0L EcoBoost engines Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 is recommended Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Premium fuel will provide improved performance and is recommended for severe duty usage such as trailer tow Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal With keyless ignition just start the engine Crank time will be longer than usual Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8 liters of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8 liters may be required The service engine soon indicator may come on For mo
101. pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry amaximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Wheels and Tires kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold tire pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or th
102. provided The safety belt system consists of lap and shoulder safety belts shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode except driver safety belt height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions retractor and anchor pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position safety belt warning light and chime Ww crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The safety belt pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body when activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal crashes the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the crash is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts US E142587 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle A E142588 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle
103. pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Avoid inhaling excess fumes Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before refueling 128 Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be h
104. reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Twoormore repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Fourormore repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes Customer Assistance THE BET
105. respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement 8 3 By using the TeleNav Software you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications including notices agreements legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software collectively Notices electronically TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software 8 4 TeleNav s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party s right to require performance at any time thereafter nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself 391 8 5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect 8 6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement As used in this Agreement the words include and including and variations thereof will not be d
106. same key cycle as you created the MyKey Once you have switched the engine off however you will need an admin key to change or clear your MyKey settings CLEARING ALL MYKEYS You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the MyKey If you switch your ignition off however you will need to use an admin key to clear your MyKeys Note When you clear your MyKeys you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings use the information display to do the following 1 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey 2 Scroll to Clear MyKey and press the OK button 3 Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED displays CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display MYKEY DISTANCE Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey If the distance does not accumulate as expected then the intended user is not using the MyKey or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey MyKeyTM NUMBER OF MYKEY S Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY S Indicates how many admin key
107. say Display settings Display to access and make ES adjustments using the touchscreen Press the Settings icon gt 328 Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer Auto DIM when set to On lets you use the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature Mode allows you to set the screen to acertain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level or turn the display off If you select AUTO or NIGHT you have the options of turning the display s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions change from day to night Edit Wallpaper You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload your own Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper Note You cannot load photos directly from your camera You must access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an SD card Note Photographs with extremely large dimensions such as 2048 x 1536 may not be compatible and appear as a blank black image on the display Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos ES To access press the Settings icon gt Display gt Edit Wallpaper and then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs MyFord Touch it equipped Only the photograph s which meets the following condition
108. scores NBA headlines NBA schedule NBA scores NFL headlines NFL schedule NFL scores NHL headlines NHL schedule NHL scores 364 WNBA headlines MyFord Touch it equipped Additional sports related voice commands WNBA schedule WNBA scores Help Alerts 5 If your vehicle is equipped with 2 Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Alerts and then choose from any of the following services View the complete message Delete the message Delete All messages This screen displays any system messages such as an SD card fault Note The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information icon yellow After you read or delete the messages the icon returns to white Calendar O If your vehicle is equipped with 2 Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Press Calendar You can view the current calendar by day week or month 911 Assist If Equipped WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the ris
109. secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child All children are shaped differently The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations or are the minimum WARNINGS requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or go to http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation locate your local St John Ambulance office by searching for St John Ambulance on the internet or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http Awww tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child Child Safety Recomme
110. select from the following Interaction Mode Voice control Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter action and guidance Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off 330 MyFord Touch it equipped Voice control Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system s voice volume level Even with confirmation prompts turned off the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings Media Player Press the Settings icon gt Ts Settings gt Media Player then select from the following Media player Autoplay When this feature is on the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process When this feature is off the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source Bluetooth Devices Select to connect disconnect add or delete a device You can also set a device as your fav
111. select your message notification change phone book entries and automatically download your cellular phone among other features SYNC Services Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various types of information traffic reports and directions 911 Assist Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an accident when used properly Vehicle Health Report Create andreceive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC capable mobile applications on your smartphone System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings Add Connect Set as Primary On and Off Delete as well as Advanced menulistings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK This is a phone dependent feature This is a phone dependent and speed dependent feature This is an optional feature and available in the United States only This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only 295 SYNCTM Text Messaging Note This is a phone dependent feature SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road Receiving a Text Message Note This is a phone dependent feature Your phone must support
112. should disappear shortly Sat Fault SIRIUS System Failure There is an internal module or system failure present If this message does not clear shortly or with an igni tion key cycle your receiver may have a fault See an authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available Tune to another channel or choose another preset Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna 345 The signal is blocked When you move into an open area the signal should return MyFord Touch i equipped Troubleshooting tips Radio display Cause Action Updating Update of channel No action required The programming in progress process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS Your satellite service isno Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 1 888 539 7474 longer available 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues None found Check Channel All the channels in the Guide Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked function on that station Subscription Updated vehicle SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your No action required
113. signal strength The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United States Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would trigger 911 Assist however SYNC tries to contact emergency services if 911 Assist triggers If a connected phone sustains damage or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call If you fail to cancel the call SYNC attempts to dial 911 SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre recorded message plays for the 911 operator and then the occupant s in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically MyFord Touch it equipped 911 Assist May Not Work If Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash The vehicle s battery or the SYNC system has no power The phone s thr
114. sunlight if possible If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders Periodically wash your vehicle stored in exposed locations Touch up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust Cover chrome and stainless steel parts witha thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when your vehicle is washed Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil Cover interior trim to prevent fading Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents 232 The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 30 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add a quality gas stabilizer product to your vehicle s fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label your vehicle s
115. support for any questions you may have Driving Restrictions For your safety certain features are speed dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph 5 km h Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving When using SYNC Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Place cords and cables out of the way so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abilities Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s manual for further information Do not attempt to service or repair the system See an authorized dealer Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more eff
116. t talk right now Callme Call U later Be there in 10 minutes Be there in 20 minutes Yes Pre defined text message options No Why Thanks Where R you need more directions love you Too funny Can t wait to see you I m stuck in traffic Accessing Your Phone Settings These are phone dependent features Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone text message notification modify your phonebook and set up automatic download 1 Press the phone button 2 Scroll to Phone Settings and then press OK 3 Scroll to select from the following options When you select You can Phone Status See the provider name signal power battery power and roaming status of your connected phone Press OK to select and scroll to view the information When done press OK again to return to the phone status menu Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call one of the system s or your phone s 1 Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1 Ringer 2 Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer 2 Press OK to select 297 SYNCTM When you select You can If your phone supports in band ringing your phone s ring tone plays when you choose Phone Ringer Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives
117. testing See Emission Control System page 132 Instrument Cluster Traction and Stability Control A It will flash when the system is 3 active If it remains illuminated or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on this indicates a malfunction During a malfunction the system will switch off Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Traction and Stability Control Off It will illuminate when you switch the system off It will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver s door and you have left the key in the ignition with it in the off or accessory position Engine On Warning Chime Awarning chime will sound when any door is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed Keyless Warning Alert if Equipped Sounds the horn twice when you exit the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN indicating the vehicle is still on Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver s door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Automatic Tran
118. that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired Adissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types Wheels and Tires T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not Exceed 50 mph 80 km h Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label Tow a trailer Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at atime Use commercial car washing equipment Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following Handling stability and braking performance Comfort and noise Ground clearance and parking at curbs Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability All wheel driving capabili
119. the driver s side hood Any non Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle 381 Appendices END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SYNC End User License Agreement EULA You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation MS SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The MS SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation FORD SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved 382 The MS SOFTWARE and or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and o
120. the passenger s frontal airbag If the passenger airbag status indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Supplementary Restraints System Occupant Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag indicator Empty Unlit Disabled Child Lit Disabled Adult Unlit Enabled Note When the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is illuminated the passenger side airbag seat mounted may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it is very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seatback and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following Objects lodged underneath the seat Objects between the seat cushion and the center console Objects hanging off the seatback Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers
121. the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion Radio Voice Commands If you are listening to the radio ns press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to the radio press the voice button and after the tone say Radio then any of the following commands MyFord Touch i equipped RADIO lt 87 9 107 9 gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD RADIO n3 Tune Help If available lt 530 1710 gt 3 If you have said Browse see the AM Browse chart later in this section AM lt 530 1710 gt If you have said Tune see the following AM autoset Tune chart AM autoset preset lt gt TUNE AM preset lt gt lt 530 1710 gt Browse lt 87 9 107 9 gt FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt AM FM lt 87 9 1079 gt HD lt gt ese OG AM autoset EM autoset FM autoset preset lt gt EM preset lt gt AM autoset preset lt gt AM preset lt gt EM EM 1 FMI preset lt gt FM lt 87
122. the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre recorded message plays for the 911 operator and then the occupant s in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically SYNCTM 911 Assist May Not Work If Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash The vehicle s battery or the SYNC system has no power The phone s thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on Vehicle Health Report WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certa
123. the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection What You Should Know About Fail Safe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How Fail Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area and A high engine temperature E message will appear in the meadi information display The service engine soon indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However The engine power will be limited The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage Maintenance When Fail Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS F
124. the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision 35 The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags do not inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag Note You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys This is normal The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds for example baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag d
125. the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer See Tire Pressure Monit oring System page 251 Tire Pressure Sensor Amber Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is Fault malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions see See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 251 If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Traction Control Message Message Action Indicator Traction control off Displays when the traction control system has been switched off See Using Traction Control page 147 100 Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL E141421 A do FR Select to distribute air through GPA Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and floor Ve the windshield and floor air Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off If you switch the fan off the windshield may fog up Recirculated air Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air When you select recirculated air the button illuminates and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce Unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Temperature control Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
126. the water Note Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 centimeters above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components Causing internal damage to the components Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required Towing TOWING POINTS Due to local market requirements in some countries some vehicles may be equipped with a recovery hook Recovery Hook Location If your vehicle is equipped with a screw in recovery hook it is located in the spare wheel well If your vehicle is not equipped with a recovery hook you can purchase one from your dealer Installing the Recovery Hook There is an installation point for the recovery hook located behind the fascia Note The screw in recovery hook has a left hand thread Turn it counterclockwise to install it Make sure that the recovery hook is fully tightened E146284 Insert a suitable object to pry open the cover 1
127. this button to manually search through the radio frequency band ON OFF and VOL Press this button to switch the audio system off and on Turn to adjust the volume Eject Press this button to eject a CD SEEK Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or the next or previous track ona CD SOUND Press this button to adjust the sound settings for Bass Treble Balance and Fade SOURCE Press this button to access different audio modes such as AM FM and A V Input 275 Audio System AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH SONY AM FM CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving E A B F SOURCE A E143844 C Note The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen Note The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features See MyFord Touch page 320 A Power Press this button to switch the system off and on B SOURCE Press this button to access different audio modes such as AM FM and
128. to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic attention for normal wear Windshield Wiper Blades Spark Plugs except in California The Clutch Disc Brake Pads and Linings Shock Absorbers Belts and Hoses Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment Contact your selling authorized Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan Just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment program To learn more call our Ford ESP specialists at 800 367 3377 Don t forget to ask about our interest free payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time You are pre approved with no credit checks no hassles Complete the information below and mail to Ford ESP P O Box 8072 Royal Oak MI 48068 0039 Name PLEASE PRINT ADDRESS APT CITY STATE ZIP E MAIL 398 Ford Extended Service Plan ESP SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Depend
129. to you device such as a USB drive Dial to call the contact Ignore to exit the screen Text message options I ll call you back in a few minutes Phone Settings just left I ll be there soon Press Phone gt Settings Can you give me acall Bluetooth Devices lm on my way Touch this tab to connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a I m running a few minutes late favorite I m ahead of schedule so I ll be there Bluetooth early Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on I m outside Do Not Disturb Pll call you when get there Touch this tab if you want all calls to go OK directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehicle When this feature is on text Yes message notifications do not ring inside No the cabin either Thanks 911 Assist Stuck in traffic Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See Information page 359 Call me later Phone Ringer LOL Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call Choose from possible system ring tones your currently paired phone s ring tone a beep text to speech or a silent notification 357 MyFord Touch f Equipped Text Message Notification Select a text message notification if supported by your phone Choose from possible system alert tones text to speech or silent Internet Data Connection If your phone is compatible use this screen to a
130. turning the sensing system off See MyKey page 49 The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on When receiving a detection warning the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio volume returns to the previous level Rear Sensing System The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R Reverse As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the rate of the audible warning increases When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches 30 centimeters away the warning sounds continuously If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 12 inches 30 centimeters from the side of the vehicle the tone sounds for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the warning sounds again Parking Aids E130178 A Coverage area of up to 6 feet 1 8 meters from the rear bumper There is decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R Reverse and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less but not moving and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less The system can be switched off through the information display If a fault is present in the system a warning
131. vehicle Adjust to select the desired temperature If you select MAX A C the system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning When the temperature control is in the MAX A C position you cannot turn off air conditioning or recirculated air Airconditioning Press to switch the air conditioning off and on Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Air distribution control Adjust to select the desired air distribution Select to distribute air through PH Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents 177 the floor air vents air vents vents 101 Climate Control Select to distribute air through clear the windshield of a thin covering of the windshield air vents You can ice You can also increase the temperature also use this setting to defog and and fan speed to improve clearing AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL E141422 A O B Cc D E v T I J l H G F AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Once you select your desired temperature using the temperature control the system then automatically determines fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach and maintain the desired temperature Fan spe
132. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure abel you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving ona significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Wheels and Tires Please note that the TPMS is nota substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exis
133. wash or standing water to dry the brakes Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power If you experience this condition apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop Turn the engine off shift to position P and apply the parking brake and then inspect the accelerator pedal for any interferences If none are found and the condition persists have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer 145 Emergency Brake Assist Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal Emergency brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations Anti lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking This lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the anti lock braking system may be disabled and may need to be serviced BRAKE If the system is disabled normal oO braking is still effective If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released have your brake system serviced immediately HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI LOCK BRAKES Note When the system is o
134. wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the wheel and tire assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing ata minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the wheel and tire assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing your system is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system or some component of the system may be damaged Safety Practices WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand do not rapidly spin the tires Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three
135. when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start system the MyKey restrictions remain active With a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally If this happens then the remote start fob is the admin key If you want to have only one real key as a MyKey or do not want to have any MyKeys then you need to use your remote start to clear all MyKeys In that case follow these steps Enter the vehicle and close all doors Remote start the vehicle using your remote Start fob See Clearing All MyKeys page 50 Follow Steps 1 3 After clearing your MyKeys you can create anew MyKey See Creating a MyKey page 50 Note For vehicles with Intelligent Access keys push button start you cannot program the remote start system as a MyKey Always treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key Vehicles With Non Ford approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems MyKeyTM MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see a Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved system The following information may help customers who choose to install a non Ford approved remote start system The actions provided below do not make MyKey compatible with non Ford approved remote start systems but may help you retain some MyKey functions When using a no
136. with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 174 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 lb and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and Lggage load capacity is 650 lb 1400 750 5x 150 650 lb Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 p
137. your vehicle does not have admin privileges No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey page 50 The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 lost the only admin key I lost a key Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer Program a spare key See Passive Anti Theft System page 64 accidentally programmed all keys as MyKeys The vehicle has a remote start system that is recognized as an admin key Clear all MyKeys by using the remote start See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 The vehicle s system does not recognize any programmed Mykeys See Creating a MyKey page 50 MyKey total includes one additional key An unknown key or fob has been created as a MyKey The vehicle has a remote start system See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 Admin key total includes one additional key An unknown key or fob has been programmed to the vehicle as an admin key 53 MyKeyTM Condition Potential Causes The vehicle has a remote start system See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems page 51 MyKey distances do not accumulate The MyKey user is not using the MyKey An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys The key system has been reset No MyKey functions with the Intel
138. your vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 4 mph 7 km h your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to accessory and you open the driver door within 10 minutes of the switching the ignition off or to accessory Note The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock Note Your authorized dealer can perform this procedure or you can do the procedure yourself To enable or disable these features do the following Note You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure Locks 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Press the power door unlock button three times 3 Switch the ignition off 4 Press the power door unlock button three times 5 Switch the ignition on The horn will sound indicating your vehicle is in programming mode Autolock Press the power door unlock button then the lock button The horn will sound once if disabled or twice one short and one long if enabled Autounlock Press the power door lock button then the unlock button The horn will sound once if disabled or twice one short and one long if enabled After programming the feature switch the ignition off The horn will sound once indicating programming is complete Note You can enable or disable the autounlock feature independently of the autolock featu
139. 1 Seats Recline Adjustment WARNING Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat back before returning it to the original position Pull on the seat back to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat back to its original position An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash POWER SEATS f EQUIPPED WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver s seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle is in motion may cause 163872 loss of control of your vehicle Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position 112 Seats E138647 Power Lumbar if Equipped noie eee E138648 113 MEMORY FUNCTION ireouippep WARNINGS Before activating the seat memory make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving This feature will automatically recall the position of the driver s seat and power mirrors The memory control is located on the driver s door You can save up to three memory position pre sets Seats E142554 Saving a Pre Set Position 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to your desired position 3 Press and hold the desired memory button until you hear a si
140. 2 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel Say Goodbye from the SYNC Services main menu SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams or a news category You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services You can even access your account outside your vehicle Just use the number on your phone s call history Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available 306 SYNCTM USING SYNCTM WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle s speaker system using the system s media menu or voice commands You can also sort and play your music by specific categor
141. 2434 Press the button to switch the system off It will remain off for the entire ignition cycle The system can also be switched off through the information display ACTIVE PARK ASSIST ir EQUIPPED WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed even when the system is in use Note The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space hands free while you control the accelerator gearshift and brakes The system visually and audibly instructs you to park the vehicle 152 The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space i e a pedestrian or cyclist or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground i e a bus tow truck or flatbed truck Note The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections Note The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves Note After a tire change the system will go through a relearning procedure During this time the system performance may deterio
142. 32 Personal Safety System Personal Safety System oo 34 Supplementary Restraints System Principle of Operation 35 Driver and Passenger Airbags 36 Knee Airbag 37 Front Passenger Sensing System 37 Side Airbagss i A 40 Safety CanopyM een 41 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator 42 Airbag DIsposal 43 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio FrequencIes n 44 Remote Controlin 44 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Eonia aT EEEE TEER 48 MyKey Principle of Operation 49 Creating a Mykey Clearing All MyKeys Checking MyKey System Status 50 Using MyKey With Remote Start SYSTEMS nn rer ae 51 MyKey Troubleshooting 52 Locks Locking and Unlocking 55 Manual Liftgate 58 Power Liftgate 59 Keyless Entry 62 Security Passive Anti Theft System 64 Anti Theft Alarmes 65 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel 66 AUGIO CONnMO lessees 66 Voice Control 68 Gr sse r COMO lissi 68 Information Display Control 68 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers 70 Table of Contents AUTOWIPErS n Windshield Washers S Rear Window Wiper and Washers 71 Lighting Lighting Control AVOA MDS Daytime Running Lamps Front FOE LAMPS Direction Indicators IM FIOT LAMPE ses Ambient Lighting Windows and Mirrors Power Windows 78 Exterior Mirror S
143. 54 It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 32 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check the air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNINGS The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the ti
144. A V Input C Seek Reverse and Fast Forward In radio mode select a frequency band and press these buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction In SIRIUS mode press these buttons to select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected such as Jazz Rock or News use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category In CD mode press these buttons to select the previous or next track Audio System D TUNE In radio mode press these buttons to manually search through the radio frequency band In SIRIUS mode press these buttons to find the next or previous available satellite radio station E Volume Turn this control to adjust the volume F SOUND Press this button to access settings for Treble Middle Bass Balance and Fade G Eject Press this button to eject a CD Press the up and down arrow buttons to Menu Structure scroll through the options Note Depending on your system some Press the right arrow to enter a menu options may appear slightly different Press the left arrow to exit a menu Press MENU Press OK to confirm a selection Manual tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band Channel Guide Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM AST and FM AST frequency bands PTY Set Category Sel
145. About Uniform Tire Quality mading ean EA 236 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Temperature A BC Traction AA A BC Treadwear Tire Pressure Monitoring System 251 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System 252 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System ou cseeeseseeeseesesesesseseens 252 Tires See Wheels and Tires 234 Towing a Trailer Load Placement Towing Points Installing the Recovery Hook Recovery Hook Location Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels Towing the Vehicle on Four Emergency Towing Recreational Towing TOWING aiiai Traction Control Principle of Operation Trailer Sway Control Transmission Code Designation TANSMISSION aie areas 136 Transmission See Transmission Transporting the Vehicle Trip Computer All Value Average Fuel Distance to E Resetting the Trip Computer Trip Odometer Trip Timer U Under Hood Overview 1 6L ECOBOOS tM senienas Eere 208 Under Hood Overview 2 0L ECOBOOST Manii tenaient 209 Under Hood Overview 2 5L Universal Garage Door Opener 16 HomeLink Wireless Control System 116 USB PONG re mena Using Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control Off Switching Cruise Control On Using Four Wheel Drive 140 Driving in Special Conditions With Four Wheel Drive 140 Using MyKey With Remote Start ng Stabi
146. Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated End User Notice Microsoft Windows Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Read and follow instructions Before using your Windows Automotive based system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences Keep User s Guide in vehicle When kept in the vehicle the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive based system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully Appendices WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences Do not change system settin
147. Assistance 190 Data Recording 9 Event Data Recording Service Data Recording Index Daytime Running Lamps Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps Vehicle With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps Digital AUdiO 2rrrrrrrraeerns 279 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Direction Indicators as Driver and Passenger Airbags 36 Children and Airbags 37 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Driving Aids Driving Hints 183 Driving Through Water 184 DRL See Daytime Running Lamps Eco Mode se Resetting Eco Mode 164 TYDE lasse Type 2 and 3 Economical Driving 183 Emission Control System 132 On Board Diagnostics OBD I1 133 Readiness for Inspection Maintenance UM Testing siasii 133 End User License Agreement 382 SYNC End User License Agreement Using the Engine Block Heater Engine Coolant Check Adding Engine Coolant Checking the Engine Coolant Recycled Engine Coolant 214 Severe Climates ss 214 What You Should Know About Fail Safe COONS cniinn 214 Engine Immobilizer See Passive Anti Theft System 64 Engine Oil Check Adding Engine Oil Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring 417 Engine Oil Dipstick 1 6L EcoBoost Engine Oil Dipstic EcoBoost 2 5L Engine Specifications 261 Drivebelt Routing Entertainment A V Inputs AM FM Radio Bluetooth
148. Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment Load Carrying PAYLOAD E143816 Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If you install any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment on the vehicle you must subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle
149. CENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL Appendices WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER Gracenote 2007 FCC ID KMHSYNCG2 IC 1422A SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co loc
150. Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Use a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or fingerprints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 8 00pm EST Inthe United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays MyFord Touch it equipped Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Do not attempt to service or repair the system See an authorized dealer Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Place cords and cables out of the way so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abili
151. Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and services suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may disclose this information to others but not in a form that personally identifies you Internet Based Services Components The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet based services You acknowledge and agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE Additional Software Services The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates 384 supplements add on components or Internet based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE Supplemental Components If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third
152. Distribut Pre Fuse BOX ennemie 197 G Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge Information Display General Information on Radio Frequencies 44 Intelligent Access 44 General Maintenance Information 400 Multi Point Inspection Owner Checks and Services Protecting Your Investment Why Maintain Your Vehicle Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership cscsseesestssecssseesesteseeesesseseeseeees 400 Getting Assistance Outside the U S and S lale o le O 193 Getting the Services You Need Away From Home 418 Handbrake See Parking Brake Hazard Warning Flashers Headlamp Exit Delay Head Restraints Adjusting the Head Restraint Heated Seats Heated Windows and Mirrors Heated Exterior Mirror is Heated Rear Window 107 Heating See Climate Control Hill Start Assist Using Hill Start Assist Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate Cooling the Interior Quickly General Hints Heating the Interior QUICKLY Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions Recommended Settings for Cooling Recommended Settings for Heating Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods during Extreme High Ambient Temperatures nanie 06 Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Brakes 145 Hood Lock See Opening and Closing the Hood 206 Ignition
153. Drive it Equipped When driving at slow speeds off road under high load conditions use a low gear when possible Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the air conditioning may cycle on and off to prevent the engine from overheating Basic Operating Principles Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle When driving your vehicle on surfaces made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice proceed with care If Your Vehicle leaves the Road If your vehicle leaves the road reduce your vehicle speed and avoid severe braking When your vehicle speed has been reduced ease your vehicle back onto the road Do not turn the steering wheel sharply while returning your vehicle to the road It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the road You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly It may be less risky to strike small objects such as freeway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the road which could cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern Emergency Maneuvers In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp t
154. EJ5J 194321 AA m m April 2013 First Printing Owner s Manual Escape FSC MIX Paper FSC C102270 Litho in U S A The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print In the interest of continuous development we reserve the right to change specifications design or equipment at any time Without notice or obligation No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission Errors and omissions excepted Ford Motor Company 2013 All rights reserved Part Number 20130410194118 Table of Contents Introduction About This Manual 7 Symbols Glossary 7 Data Recording wD California Proposition 65 wall Perchlorate wll OC Ol c o Re 1 Replacement Parts Recommendation 1 Special Notices 12 Mobile Communications EQUIPMENT 12 Export Unique Options 13 Child Safety General Information 14 Child Seat Positioning 15 Booster Seats Ki Installing Child Seats 19 Child Safety LOcks 24 Safety Belts Principle of Operation 26 Fastening the Safety Belts 27 Safety Belt Height Adjustment 30 Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator CRIME SR andere 30 Safety Belt Minder 31 Child Restraint and Safety Belt Maintenance ss
155. GENERAL INFORMATION En E142598 SYNC is an in vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone and portable media player This allows you to Make and receive calls Access and play music from your portable music player Use 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands Stream music from your connected phone Text message a a SYNC Powered by Microsoft Use the advanced voice recognition system Charge your USB device if your device supports this These features require activation See SYNC Applications and Services page 301 Make sure that you review your device s manual before using it with SYNC Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 8 00pm EST Inthe United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 SYNCTM Times are subject to change due to holidays SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online Required to activate the subscription based SYNC Services and to personalize your Saved Points and Favorites Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC Access to customer
156. I system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Refueling page 130 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required 2 4 133 If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine so
157. IRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account When in satellite radio mode press Options Audio System Troubleshooting Radio display Condition Possible action Acquiring Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel No action required This message should disappear shortly Sat Fault SIRIUS system failure There is an internal module or system failure present If this message does not clear shortly or with an igni tion key cycle your receiver may have a fault See an authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available Tune to another channel or choose another preset Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel programming in progress No Signal The signal is lost fromthe The signalis blocked When SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area tower to your vehicle the signal should return antenna Updating Update of channel No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Your sa
158. Indicator MyKey active Drive Displays when MyKey is active Safely MyKey Speed Limited to Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey XX MPH km h is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on MyKey Vehicle Near Top Amber Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey Speed speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h MyKey Vehicle at Top Amber Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey Speed speed limit is reached MyKey Check Speed Displays when MyKey is active Drive Safely MyKey Buckle Up to Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt Unmute Audio Minder is activated MyKey Park aid cannot be deactivated Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated 96 Information Displays Message Message Action Indicator Key is Already a MyKey Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already designated as a MyKey Hold key next to symbol Displays when programming a MyKey on steering column MyKey ESC cannot be Displays when programming a MyKey deactivated Park Aid Message Message Action Indicator Parking aid malfunction Amber Displays when the system has detected a Service required condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer See Parking Aid page 150 Park Brake Message Message Action Indicator Park brake applied Red Displays when the parking brake is set the engine is runnin
159. K to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones and all information originally saved with those phones Press OK to select Return Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature You can only connect one device at a time When another phone is connected the previous one is disconnected 299 SYNCTM Advanced The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts languages defaults perform a master reset insta application and view system 1 Press the phone button to enter the phone menu 2 Scroll to System Settings Press OK ll an 3 Scroll to Advanced Press OK nformation 4 Scroll to select from the following options If you select You can Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions helpful hints or asking you for a specific action To turn these prompts on or off Press OK to select and scroll to select between On and Off 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Languages Choose between English Fran ais and Espa ol Once selected all of the radio displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display If you change the language setting the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanc
160. LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat E142535 Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol E144054 Child Safety The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions Center Seating Use WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches 28 centimeters center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inche
161. NC Services 360 Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features provided are only an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not subscribe or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data t
162. NE button press it to manually search the frequency band Number block In radio mode store your favorite radio stations To store a radio station tune to the station then press and hold a preset button until sound returns In CD mode press one of these buttons to select a track Seek Press and release this button to go to the next preset radio station or disc track Press and hold this button to fast forward to the next strong radio station memory preset or through the current disc track 269 Audio System ON OFF Press this button to turn the system off and on Turn to adjust the volume Seek Press and release this button to go to the previous preset radio station or disc track Press and hold this button to reverse to the previous strong radio station memory preset or through the current disc track MENU Press this button to access different audio system features See Menu Structure later in this section SOUND Press this button to access settings for Treble Middle Bass Fade and Balance Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings When you make your selection press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings Press OK to set or press MENU to exit Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently AUX Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port N RADIO Press this button to listen to the
163. RATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal For more information visit Web Address www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate FORD CREDIT U S Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit thank you for your business For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us as well as help manage your account 1l Phone 1 800 727 7000 For more information regarding Ford Credit as well as access Account Manager please go to www fordcredit com REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner s
164. REAR VIEW CAMERA 1FEQUIPPED WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar If the liftgate is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines if enabled have been removed when the liftgate is ajar Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle During operation lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle O xxxxxxxx XX XXXX E142435 The camera is located on the liftgate Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R Reverse The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle Active guidelines Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversin
165. REQUIRED in the information display Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals It is a guideline only Actual oil NORMAL SCHEDULED change intervals depend on several factors MAINTENANCE and generally decrease with severity of use Intelligent Oil Life Monitor Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used By using several important factors in its calculations the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time 403 Scheduled Maintenance When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Miles kilometers Vehicle use and example Normal 7500 10000 Normal commuting with highway driving 12000 16000 No or moderate load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling Severe 5000 7499 Moderate to heavy load or towing 8000 11999 Mountainous or off road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation Extreme 3000 4999 4000 7999 Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Maintenanc
166. RROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving Windows and Mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference Some mirrors also have a second pivot point This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night Auto Dimming Mirror it equipped Note Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror Mirror performance may be affected A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up SUN VISORS E138666 nn Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade Illuminated Vanity Mirror it equipped E162197 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on MOONROOF iF EQUIPPED WARNINGS Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves When closing the moonroof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets
167. Reliable quality service anywhere you go Repairs performed by factory trained technicians using Genuine Ford and Lincoln parts Rental Car Reimbursement Ist day Rental Benefit You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs Extended Rental Benefits If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or Field Service Actions Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts Out of fuel and lock out assistance Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you sell your vehicle prospective buyers may have a higher degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford ESP thereby improving resale value Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance and select items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have
168. Repeat off and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen Repeat Repeat track Shuffle Shuffle CD DP Shuffle folder TM Shuffle off E142620 Help SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC This applies to WMA or MP3 files only SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card al En USB Port Note Your SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card press the card in and the system ejects it Do not attempt to O OC O pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage Note The navigation system also uses this card slot See Navigation page 371 E142621 The USB ports are located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen 348 MyFord Touch it equipped This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks flash drives or thumb drives and charge devices if they support this feature In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When you connect the cable to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port Playing Music from Your Device Insert your device and select the D SD Card or USB tab once the system recognizes it You can then s
169. Switch 123 In California U S Only Information Display Control Multimedia Controls Information Displays E General Information ss 88 Informati 911 Assis SIRIUS Ti Only Vehicle Health Report Informati Battery and Charging System Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Engine Hill Start Assis Keyless Vehicle Lighting Maintenance Message indicator Park Brake Power Steering Starting System Tire Pressure Monitoring System Traction Control Transmission and Four Wheel Drive Installing Child Seats Child Seats Using Lap and Shoulder Belts Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Using Tether Straps Instrument Cluster Instrument Lighting Dimmer Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps Interior Lamps Front Interior Lamp Rear Interior Lamp Interior Mirror Auto Dimming Mirror Introduction 419 Jump Starting the Vehicle Connecting the Jumper Cables Jump Starting Preparing Your Vehicle Removing the Jumper Cables K Keyless Entry SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY Ignition Modes Keys and Remote Controls 44 Knee Airbag 37 Lighting Control Headlamp Flasher ald High Beams wld Lighting Load Carriers See Roof Racks and Load Carriers Load Carrying Load Limit Special Loading Instructions for Owners o
170. TER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO
171. USB Autoplay off Autoplay on Connections Pause Play Play album lt name gt Play all Play artist lt name gt Play genre lt name gt n3 Play next folder Play next track SYNCTM USB USB Play playlist lt name gt Search artist lt name gt Play previous folder 13 Search genre lt name gt Play previous track Search song lt name gt Play song lt name gt Search track lt name gt Play track lt name gt Shuffle off Refine album lt name gt Shuffle on Refine artist lt name gt Similar music Refine song lt name gt What s playing lt name gt isa dynamic listing meaning that Refine track lt name gt it could be the name of anything such as Repeat off a group artist or song This voice command is not available until Repeat on indexing is complete Search album lt name gt This voice command is only available in folder mode Voice command guide Autoplay Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your music Search genre or Play genre The system searches all the data from your indexed music and if available begins to play
172. a pre defined set of 15 messages Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages only to SYNC To download the messages press OK to select The display indicates that it is downloading your messages When it is complete SYNC takes you to your inbox Delete All Messages allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC not your phone To delete the messages press OK to select The display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text messages SYNC returns you to the text message menu Return exits the current menu when you press OK If you select Send Text Message 1 Press OK to select If the system detects your phone does not support this feature Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC returns to the main menu Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart SYNCTM 3 Press OK when the desired selection is in the display 4 Enter the name of the recipient Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries You can also select Enter Number to say the desired number 5 Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific contact 6 Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm when the system asks if you would like to send the message The system sends each text message with the following signature This message was sent from my lt Ford or Lincoln gt Pre defined text message options Can
173. aded non navigation When a route has been ns systems press the voice button Update route on the steering wheel controls When Help prompted say any of the following commands SIRIUS Travel Link if Equipped Driving while distracted can result in Cancel route loss of vehicle control crash and Navigation voice off injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any Navigation voice on device that may take your focus off the 7 7 road Your primary responsibility is the safe Next turn operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of Route summary voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Route status 362 MyFord Touch it equipped Note n order to use SIRIUS Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot Note A paid subscription is required to access and use these features Go to www siriusxm com travellink for more information Note Visit www siriusxm com traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel Link Note Neither S RIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link se
174. adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Note f you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot for example driven more than 1 mile 1 6 kilometers never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note f you have to drivea distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 244 Wheels and Tires 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note f you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare w
175. ail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in asafe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot You have limited engine power when inthe fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Note Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible 215 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Note Transmission flu
176. alert tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone you can adjust your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode Wireless amp Internet Your system has a Wi Fi feature that creates a wireless network within your vehicle thereby allowing other devices such as personal computers or phones feature everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside your vehicle your phone supports personal area networking and if you park outside a wireless hotspot in your vehicle to speak to each other Press the Settings icon gt share files or play games Using this Wi Fi Settings gt Wireless amp Internet then select from the following 333 MyFord Touch f Equipped Wi fi Wi Fi Settings USB Mobile Broadband Wi Fi Network Client Mode turns the Wi Fi feature on and off in your vehicle Mak
177. all amount of wax in a back and forth motion not in circles Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time Roof racks Bumpers Grained door handles Side mouldings Mirror housings Windshield cowl area Do not apply wax to glass areas After waxing your car s paint should feel smooth and be free of streaks and smudges Vehicle Care CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations Cover the battery power distribution box and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Clean your windows and wiper blades regularly If the wipers do
178. all be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Vehicles Sold In The U S Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference This card is found in the owner s information portfolio in the glove compartment U S Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 3 kilometers To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Vehicles Sold In Canada Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Vehicles Sold In Canada Using Roadside Assistance For your convenience you may complete the roadside assistance identification card found in the centerfold of your warranty guide and retain for future reference Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U S coverage If you require more information please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide call us in Canada at 1 800 665 2006 or visit our web
179. ally in more remote geographical areas TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE WHETHER STATUTORY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties so this limitation may not apply to you Appendices 5 Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING IN EACH CASE BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV S
180. also advance and reverse the current track or current folder if applicable Repeat Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on Shuffle Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order or turn the feature off if already on Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks More Info Touch this button to see disc information Options Sound Settings Touch this button to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Compression Touch this button to turn the compression feature on and off Browse Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks CD Voice Commands If you are listening to a CD press us the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to a CD press the voice button and after the tone say CD then any of the following commands MyFord Touch i equipped CD Pause Play nn Play next track O C O DAS Play previous track Play track lt 1 512 gt E142619 The SD card slot is located either in the Repeat folder center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access
181. and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack E145908 9 Small arrow shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points E162190 Wheels and Tires 10 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench Note f equipped with full wheel covers with exposed wheel nuts remove the wheel nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or damage to the wheel cover may occur 1 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown See Technical Specifications page 259 Stowing the flat tire 1 12 E75442 13 Put the jack and lug wrench away Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive Unblock the wheels 258 Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo area Secure with the flat tire retainer strap by following the next steps E142906 4 Locate the cargo tie down near the seat back Push the loop of the retainer strap through the tie down Thread the non loop end through the loop b E157926 5 Weave the retainer strap through the wheel openings 6 Locate the front cargo tie down at the opposite corner of the cargo area to the tie
182. ark assist process is done active park search The driver is responsible for checking the driving above 6 mph 10 km h during parking job and making any necessary automatic steering oe before putting the transmission turning off the traction control system eee Certain vehicle conditions can also Deactivating the Park Assist deactivate the system such as Feature Traction control has activated ona The system can be deactivated manually slippery or loose surface by There is an anti lock brake system pressing the active park assist button activation or failure grabbing the steering wheel Any door except the driver s opens Something touches the steering wheel 154 Parking Aids If a problem occurs with the system a recurring or frequent system faults contact warning message is displayed followed an authorized dealer to have your vehicle by achime Occasional system messages serviced may occur in normal operation For Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off Any door except the driver s may not be completely closed The system does not offer a particular space Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space The vehicle is farther than
183. armful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin clothing or both promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction Fuel and Refueling FUEL QUALITY Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause vehicle damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Choosing the Right Fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 15 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel fuel fuel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission control system Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law Octane Recommendations 2 5L engine Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 is recommended Some fuel stations offer fuels
184. as access phone and system settings You can also access advanced features such as 91 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services When you select You can Phone Redial Redial the last number called if available Press OK to select and then press OK again to confirm Call History Access any previously dialed received or missed calls after you connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to SYNC Press OK to select 2 Scroll to select from Call History Incoming Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed Press OK to make your selection 3 Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec tion 294 SYNCTM When you select You can Note The system attempts to automatically re download your phonebook and call history each time your phone connects to SYNC if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone supports this feature Phonebook Access and call any contacts in your previously down loaded phonebook 1 Press OK to confirm and enter If your phonebook has fewer than 255 listings they appear alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 entries the system organizes them into alphabetical categories 2 Scroll until the desired contact appears then press OK 3 Press OK or the phone button Text Message Send download and delete text messages Phone Settings View your phone s status set ring tones
185. at Accessories Ford com U S only Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada authorized dealer Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer installed Ford Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit 12 months or 12000 miles 20000 km whichever occurs first or the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Exterior style Hood deflector Side window deflectors Splash guards Custom graphics Interior style Floor mats Interior light kit Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s packages Cargo area protector Cargo net Cargo shade Soft cargo organizers Roof racks and carriers 380 Recovery hook towing eye Trailer towing accessories Peace of mind Keyless entry keypad Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks Bumper mounted parking assist system Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your For
186. ate Province information Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs Have the system display incident icons Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur Have the system display any smog alerts Have the system display weather warnings Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce ments Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes 332 MyFord Touch it equipped Phone Press the Settings icon gt hs Settings gt Phone then select from the following Phone Bluetooth Devices Bluetooth Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Turn Bluetooth on and off Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and donot ring inside your vehicle 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See Information page 359 Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Text Message Notification Select the type of notification for text messages
187. ate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy 135 Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission Putting your vehicle in gear Fully press down the brake pedal 2 Press and hold the button on the front of the gearshift lever 3 Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear 4 Release the button and your transmission will remain in the selected gear E133124 P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning Come to acomplete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of P Park R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutra
188. ated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 396 Ford Extended Service Plan ESP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN SERVICE PLANS U S Only More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford Extended Service Plan It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford Extended Service Plan With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your authorized dealer for details 1 PremiumCARE Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered 2 ExtraCARE Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items 3 BaseCARE Covers 84 components 4 PowertrainCARE Covers 29 critical components Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford and Lincoln dealers in the U S and Canada It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get
189. atically Traction Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction If your vehicle begins to slide the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and when needed reduces engine power at the same time If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction USING TRACTION CONTROL In certain situations for example stuck in snow or mud turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power Turn off the traction control system through the information display See General Information page 88 System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac system the stability control light will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac system was not manually disabled through the information display If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The stability control light ce temporarily illuminates on engine start up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system The stability control off light c temporarily illumi
190. ational Sale of Goods shall not apply 7 Assignment You may not resell assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations except in totality in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such sale assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement without liability to TeleNav in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software Notwithstanding the foregoing TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement Appendices 8 Miscellaneous 8 1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof 8 2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted inthis Agreement TeleNav retains all right title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software including without limitation all related intellectual property rights No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to or shall be granted or conferred by implication statute inducement estoppel or otherwise and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their
191. aximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 236 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA ABC WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not inclu
192. ayback video from your iPod or iPhone you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When you connect the cable to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port PHONE E161968 353 Troubleshooting Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output The jack only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problem persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with headphones as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control such as Play or Pause over the attached portable media player MyFord Touch f Equipped Phone Quick Dial Phonebook History Messaging Settings nmo N amp gt Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC Once you pair your phone you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At aminimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth w
193. ays use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations Note Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle This manual may qualify the location of a component as left hand side or right hand side The side is determined when facing forward in the seat E154903 A Right hand side B Left hand side Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Safety alert tr See Owner s Manual Air conditioning system G Anti lock braking system Avoid smoking flames or sparks Introduction Battery Battery acid GA Brake fluid non petroleum based gt Brake system Cabin air filter RS Check fuel cap f Child safety door lock or unlock 65 EI A Child seat lower anchor amp Q 2 ild seat tether anchor Be Ai Q ise control Do not open when hot Engine air filter f Engine coolant E Engine coolant temperature yr Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning Fasten safety belt app Front airbag e Front fog lamps Fuel pump reset Fuse compartment Hazard warning flashers Heated rear window Heated windshield lel
194. back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1inch 2 5 centimeters of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a Certified Passenger Seat Technician Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH WARNINGS Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending onthe child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two lower anchors located where seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the
195. bag and safety belt for operation Washer spray and wiper operation Clean or replace blades as necessary Multi Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems We recommend having the following multi point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great 402 Scheduled Maintenance Multi Point inspection Accessory drive belt s Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator cooler heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Fluid levels fill if necessary Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks chips or pits Half shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake coolant recovery reservoir automatic transmission and window washer If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister Replace as needed This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage based schedule Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
196. before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature will not activate The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when your vehicle has reached at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 25 seconds repeating for about five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for about one minute while your vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and more than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 25 seconds repeating for about five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 31 Safety Belts Deactivating and Activating the Belt Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use your vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate
197. belt buckle for that seating position Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle Child Safety Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode See Step 5 This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat E142528 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 20 E142529 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together L E142530 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted US E142531 Child Safety 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hea
198. can press the pedals fully Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle This will help minimize the risk of neck injury inthe event of acrash Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving The head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied An improperly adjusted head restraint may not adequately protect an occupant during an impact from the rear Seats WARNINGS Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash Note Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible Make sure that you remain comfortable If you are extremely tall adjust the head restraint to its highest position Front seat head restraint E138642 Rear seat outboard head restraints Rear center head restraint io P Poe A a 8B D The head restraints consist of A an energy absorbing head restraint B two steel stems
199. can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Load Carrying Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION A SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT 2 REAR 3 i The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs eS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29PS ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX E142516 AN TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY I TFRONT T REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES 1 TOTAL LAVANT 1 ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed yoo KIo 4 QQ Ibs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou Ib TRE CORESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR VOIR LE MANUEL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI DE LUSAGER SPARE POUR PLUS DE nee T145 90R17 15 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XX XXXX XXXXA E142517 CARGO E143817 170 Load Carrying Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload
200. cating with you about your account Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel number Touch Enter when you are done Browse Touch this button to view a list of all available stations Scroll to see more categories Touch the station you want to listen to Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information Note S RIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes 344 4 xm SATELLiTE R A D i O E142593 SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See an authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player anda list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States
201. cator light will change from red to red and green 2 Pressthe same button twice to confirm the change If done correctly the indicator light will turn green Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor Note You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor in phe K Se iN E142662 1 Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on 2 Release the program button Only the smaller round indicator light should be on 3 Press and release the program button The larger purple indicator light will flash Note The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds 4 Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand held transmitter s previously programmed button Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple 5 Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves Programming is now complete Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer Home Link buttons until the indicator light begins to flash The indicator light will begin flashing in10 to 20 seconds at which time both buttons should be released Programming has now been erased and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of
202. ce is plugged in flashing power pointis in fault mode The power point temporarily turns off power if the 150 watt limit is exceeded It can also switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted Unplug your device and switch the ignition off then on for overloading and shorting conditions Let the system cool off then turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition The power point is not designed for electric devices such as Cathode ray tube type televisions Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc Measuring devices which process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc 121 Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking acceleration or collisions including hot drinks which may spill Available console features include E142433 A Cupholder B Storage compartment with auxiliary power point auxiliary input jack USB port and media hub C Auxiliary power point OVERHEAD CONSOLE E131605 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it 122 Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS Extended idling at high engi
203. ce s firm ware SYNCTM Phoneissues Possible cause s Possible solution s Turn off the Auto phone book download setting Text messaging is not working on SYNC This is a phone dependent feature This may be a possible phone malfunction Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again USB and media issues Possible cause s Possible solution s am having trouble connecting my device This may be a possible device malfunction Try turning off the device resetting the device removing the device s battery then trying again Make sure you are using the manufacturer s cable Make sure you insert the USB cable properly into the device and the USB port Make sure that the device does not have an auto install program or active security settings SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car This is a device limitation Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures Bluetooth audio does not stream This is a phone dependent feature The device is not connected Make sure you properly connect the device to SYNC and that you have pressed play on your device SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device Your music files may not
204. ce the load weight by at least 240 pounds 104 kilograms If you remove three 100 pound 45 kilogram cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9x100 1400 440 900 60 pounds Now you have 175 the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kilograms 2 x 99 kilograms 9 x 45 kilograms 635 198 405 32 kilograms The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle ina manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick up Trucks and Utility type Vehicles WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle Towing TOWING A TRAILER WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label Towing trai
205. cement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Four Wheel Drive it Equipped We recommend that you use caution when your vehicle has either a high load or device i e ladder or luggage racks Any modifications to your vehicle that raise the center of gravity may cause your vehicle to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle control Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect you and your passenger s safety We recommend you frequently inspect your vehicle s chassis components when your vehicle is subject to off road usage 144 Brakes GENERAL INFORMATION Note Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Note Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels even under normal driving conditions Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels page 231 EMA ce Warning Lamps and Indicators page 84 0 Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car
206. ces the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen To turn on contact picture settings if your device supports this feature press Phone gt Settings gt Manage Phonebook gt Download photos from Phonebook gt On Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses when listed with phone book contact information If your phone supports this feature you can select and use these addresses as destinations and save them as favorites History After you connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to SYNC you can access any previously dialed received or missed calls You can also choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial Note This is a phone dependent feature If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system Messaging Send text messages using your touchscreen See Text messaging later in this section Settings Touch this button to access various phone settings such turning Bluetooth on and off managing your phonebook and more See Phone settings later in this section Text Messaging Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features Note Certain features in text messaging are speed dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone You can
207. child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view Child Safety 8 i E142537 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Note f you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts For the center seating positions route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint If needed the head restraints can also be removed E142538 2 Locate the correct anchor on the back panel of the rear seat for the selected seating position The anchors are labeled with the te
208. cle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note n order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Note Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime Usage may apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information such as Vehicle diagnostic information Scheduled maintenance Open recalls and Field Service Actions Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that still need servicing Making a Report 5 If you want to run a report by 2 using the touchscreen touch Apps gt Vehicle Health Report MyFord Touch f Equipped To run a report by voice ns command press the voice button on t
209. cle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag WARNINGS If the curtain airbags have deployed the curtain airbags will not function again The curtain airbags including the A B and C pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the curtain airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain sideways crashes or rollover events the Safety Canopy will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events E75004 The system consists of the following Safety canop
210. cle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca See Supplementary Restraints System page 35 Important information regarding airbag deployment is in this chapter See Roadside Emergencies page 186 Important information regarding the fuel pump shut off is in this chapter Setting 911 Assist On If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation touch the i e l a Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Touch Apps gt 911 Assist then select On You can also access 911 Assist by Pressing the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone gt 911 Assist or Pressing the Settings icon gt Help gt 911 Assist To make sure that 911 Assist works properly SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use The 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident 366 You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone to SYNC Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and
211. conditions for a specific area SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When a ES prompted say any of the following commands SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK 5 day weather forecast Fuel prices Movie listings Sports headlines Sports schedules Sports scores Traffic Weather MyFord Touch if Equipped SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK Weather map Help If you say Sports headlines Sports schedules or Sports scores you can then say any of the commands in the following chart Sports related commands Baseball College basketball College football Golf MLS My teams NBA NFL NHL WNBA Help Additional sports related voice commands Baseball headlines Baseball schedule Baseball scores College basketball headlines College basketball schedule College basketball scores College football headlines Additional sports related voice commands College football schedule College football scores Golf headlines Golf leaderboard Golf schedule MLS headlines MLS schedule MLS scores Motor sports headlines Motor sports order Motor sports schedule My team headlines My teams schedule My teams
212. contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service Note f your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced Note See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access testing or replacement Maintenance When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle To ensure proper operation of the battery management system BMS do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation Note f a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle the accessories or components may adversely affect the
213. contain the proper artist song title album or genre information The file may be corrupted 316 Make sure that all song details are populated Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class SYNCTM USB and media issues Possible cause s Possible solution s The song may have copy right protection which does not allow it to play Vehicle Health Report and Services Traffic Directions and Information issues Possible cause s Possible solution s received a text that did not activate Vehicle Health Report You did not activate your account on the website You may have the wrong VIN vehicle identification number listed This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account lam unable to retrieve the report on the website or receive a system error The preferred dealer information did not load correctly When you register your account you must choose a preferred dealer If it already lists a dealer try selecting another dealer and logging out Log back in change it back to your preferred dealer and retrieve the report lam unable to submit a report This could be due to your phone s compatibility Bad signal strength You did not activate your phone on the website Update your cellular nu
214. ct set as favorite delete and add device Bluetooth isa registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Prioritize Connection Methods Choose your connection methods and change them as needed You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi Fi 334 MyFord Touch it equipped The CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of Wi Fi the Wi Fi Alliance Press the Settings icon gt Help CERTIFIED then select from the following E142626 Help Where Am View your vehicle s current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation nothing displays System Information Touchscreen system serial number Your vehicle identification number VIN Touchscreen system software version Navigation system version Map database version Sirius satellite radio ESN Gracenote Database Information and Library version Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system Driving Restrictions 91 Assist Voice Command List Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature See Informa tion page 359 In Case of Emergency ICE Quick Dial allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency Selec
215. cted to SYNC Services say Directions or Business search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business search and then Search near me If you need further 361 assistancein finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak With a live operator The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination After the route download is finished the phone call automatically ends If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Turn by turn directions appear in the information display in the status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services screen You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts When on an active route you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks
216. d These features allow you to choose to have the system avoid freeways toll roads ferries and car trains when planning your route Turn these features ON or OFF Use HOV Lanes Have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes if available when planning your route Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts Have the system use Voice amp Tones or Tone Only on your programmed route Auto Fill State Province Have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system Turn this feature ON or OFF MyFord Touch it equipped Traffic Preferences Avoid Traffic Problems Choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route Automatic Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact the current route The system does not provide a traffic alert notification Manual Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation Traffic Alert Notification Have the system display traffic alert notifications Other traffic alert features allows you to turn on certain or all traffic icons on the map such as road work incident accidents and closed roads Scroll down to view all the different types of alerts Turn these features ON or OFF Avoid Areas Choose
217. d authorized dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle Accessories When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the area of
218. d as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle Information on T Type Tires T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below A T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for temporary service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks B 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire Wheels and Tires C 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall D D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire E 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can
219. d ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal interfer ence Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service Note S RIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes 4 om S AT ELLi TE R A D i O E142593 282 SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See an authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player anda complete list of S
220. d press the START STOP button ignition off Press the START STOP button again to re enable the fuel system JUMP STARTINGTHE VEHICLE WARNINGS The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Use only an adequate sized cable with insulated clamps Preparing Your Vehicle Note Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Note Use onlya 12 volt supply to start your vehicle Note Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn all accessories off Roadside Emergencies Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING Do not attach the cables to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points Stay clear of moving parts To avoid reverse polarity connections make sure that you correctly identify the positive and negative terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables Note n the illust
221. de acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Wheels and Tires The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature ABC WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Glossary of Tire Terminology Tire label A label showing the original equipment tire sizes recommended inflation
222. dialing Call waiting notification Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 290 SYNCTM Pairing a Phone for the First Time Note SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries per Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Note Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio Put the transmission in position P Note 7o scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands free calls 1 Press the phone button When the display indicates there is no phone paired press OK 2 When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK 3 Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your device s manual if necessary 4 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful Depending on your phone s capability and your market the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up and downloading your phonebook Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Make sure to
223. distribution control to the instrument panel air vents position Recommended Settings for Cooling Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting Press the AUTO button Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings Set the temperature to 72 F 22 C Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel air vents position 105 Climate Control Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods during Extreme High Ambient Temperatures Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control Apply the parking brake Apply the parking brake Move the transmission selector lever to position P Move the transmission selector lever to position P Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A C position Press the MAX A C button Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed setting Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel and floor air vents positions Press the windshield defrosting and defogging button Press the A C button Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Adjust the fan speed to the highe
224. djust your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in roaming mode Phone Voice Commands Press the voice button on the ns steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands PHONE Call Call lt name gt Call lt name gt at home Call lt name gt at work Call lt name gt on cell 358 PHONE Call lt name gt on other Call voicemail Dial Do not disturb off Do not disturb on Forward text messages Go to hands free Hold call off Hold on Join calls Listen to text message lt gt Listen to text messages Messages Mute call Pair phone Privacy on Read text message Reply to text messages Turn ringer off Turn ringer on MyFord Touch it equipped PHONE MESSAGES
225. down used in Step 4 Thread the retainer strap through the tie down and pull tight 7 Secure by tying a 2 half hitch knot Wheels and Tires E143746 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Bolt size Ib ft Nm M12 x1 5 100 135 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 kilometers after any wheel disturbance such as tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal 259 Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles 260 Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 1 6L EcoBo
226. downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages When a new message arrives an audible tone sounds and the display indicates you have anew message You have these options Press the voice button wait for the prompt and say Read message to have SYNC read the message to you Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and the message goes into your text message inbox Press OK again and SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the message You can then also choose to reply or forward the message Press OK and scroll to choose between Reply to Text Message Press OK to access and then scroll through the list of pre defined messages to send Forward Text Message Press OK to forward the message to anyone in your Phonebook or Call History You can also choose Enter Number 296 Sending Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages Note Forwarding a text message is a speed dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph 5 km h or less Note You can only have one recipient per text message Text messaging is a phone dependent feature If your phone is compatible SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages 1 Press the phone button 2 Scroll to Text Message and then press OK Scroll to select from the following options Send Text Message allows you to send a new text message based on
227. dvanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact your authorized dealer SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact witha deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you asit deploys from the side of the seatback Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag its fuses orthe seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNINGS If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain sideways crashes the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occ
228. e Menu gt Vehicle gt Rear View Camera After changing a system setting the touch screen shows a preview of the selected features Guidelines and the Centerline Note Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The centerline is only available if Active or Fixed guidelines are on 157 AN Peer F E142436 Active guidelines Centerline Fixed guideline Green zone Fixed guideline Yellow zone Fixed guideline Red zone Rear bumper nmo aow Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines To use active guidelines turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight Parking Aids Always use caution while reversing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Selectable settings for this feature are ACTIVE FIXED FIXED and OFF Visual Park Aid Alert No
229. e When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer Maintenance Replacing Side Marker Bulbs E142798 142472 1 Remove the screws from the splash shield at the wheel well to gain access 1 Remove the bulb socket from the to the lamp assembly headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 2 Remove the bulb by gently pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the new bulb in reverse order Replacing Fog Park and Turn Signal Bulbs E142799 2 Removethe bulb holder fromthelamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Remove the bulb from the bulb holder by pulling it straight out E142797 Install the new bulbs in reverse order from the steps above A Fog Lamp B Park Lamp C Turn Signal lamp 224 Maintenance Replacing Tail Brake and Turn 6 Remove the turn signal bulb or the tail Signal Bulbs and brake bulb by turning the bulb socket counterclockwise Gently pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the new bulb in reverse order Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb GY GY 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in K the off position and open the liftgate 1 Carefully release the spring clip 2 Remove the two bolt covers using a 2 Remove the lamp standard flat tip screwdri
230. e If there are more than 255 the system categorizes them alphabetically 1 Press OK to select 2 Scroll to select the desired genre Press OK Playlists Access your playlists from formats such as ASX M3U WPL or MTP The system lists your playlists alphabetic ally in flat file mode If there are more than 255 the system categorizes them alphabetically 1 Press OK to select 2 Scroll to select the desired playlist Press OK 31 SYNCTM When you select You can Tracks Search for and play a specific indexed track SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 the system categorizes them alphabetic ally Press OK to select 2 Scroll to select the desired track Press OK Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC other files saved are not visible Press OK to select 2 Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port The system uses the metadata information of each song to compile a playlist for you Press OK toselect The system creates anew list of similar songs and begins playing This feature does not include tracks with incomplete metadata information Return Exit the current menu With certai
231. e Turn counterclockwise to lock Opening a Rear Door from Inside Pull the interior door release handle twice to unlock and open a rear door The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull will unlatch the door Activating Intelligent Access ir Equipped The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet 1 meter of your vehicle At the Front Doors Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock and open the door E87384 Press and hold the door handle lock sensor to lock your vehicle To avoid unlocking the door inadvertently be sure to only touch the lock sensor and not other areas of the door handle Note Keep the door handle surface clean to avoid issues with operation At the Liftgate Press the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Locks Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter This feature helps to prevent you from ocking yourself out of your vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors and ock your vehicle with the power door lock control all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in the ignition You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by either using the keyless entry keypad with the driver door closed pressing the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed If both front doors are closed you can lock your vehicle by any method regard
232. e bottom of the tray The closed end cap should fit inside the groove in the tray The tab at the end of the closed end cap should be oriented down and fit between the forks on the tray Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clips Reinstall the air cleaner assembly into the vehicle Reinstall the clean air tube assembly into the air cleaner assembly Tighten the air tube fastening screws ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer E142592 A 8 feet 2 4 meters B Center height of lamp to ground 220 C D 25 feet 7 6 meters Horizontal reference line Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height Note 7o see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood E142465 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top
233. e Hood Closing the Hood Opening the Hood Ordering Additional Owner s Literature Obtaining a French Owner s Manual Overhead Console P Parking Aid Front Sensing System Rear Sensing System Parking Aids Parking Brake Passive Anti Theft System 64 S CU OCK Gen renmennmen anes 64 PATS See Passive Anti Theft System 64 Perchlorate Personal Safety System How Does the Personal Safety System WOLK Pa sicsssizseicierrssscttattatnatier adearsaanacetaataaceactees 34 Index Pairing Subsequent Phones Pairing Your Phone for the First Time Phone Menu Options Phone Settings Phone Voice Commands Receiving Calls Text Messaging Power Door Locks See Locking and Unlocking Power Liftgate Obstacle Detection Opening and Closing the Liftgate Setting the Liftgate Open Height Power Seats Power Lumbar Power Steering Flui Power Windows Accessory Delay Bounce Back One Touch Down One Touch Up Window Lock R Rear Seat Armrest 5 Rear Sel Sinn hb cesemnesesrassesescesesestezee 114 Folding the Seatback 114 Recline Adjustment Unfolding the Seatback Rear Under Floor Storage Adjustable Load Floor Cargo Management System Passenger Compartment Floor Rear View Camera Using the Rear View Camera System 156 Rear View Camera See Rear View Camera 156 Rear Window Wiper and Washers Rear Window Washer
234. e Intervals At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Change engine oil and filter Rotate the tires Perform a multi point inspection recommended Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level Consult your dealer for requirements Inspect the brake pads shoes rotors drums brake linings hoses and parking brake Inspect the cabin air filter Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields Inspect the rear axle and U joints Lubricate any areas with grease fittings Four wheel drive vehicles Inspect the half shaft boots 404 Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Inspect the steering linkage ball joints suspension tire rod ends driveshaft and U joints Lubricate any areas with grease fittings Four wheel drive vehicles Inspect the tires tire wear and measure the tread depth Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between service intervals Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes See Engine Oil Check page 211 Other maintenance items Every 20000 miles 32000 Replace cabin air filter km Every 30000 miles 48000 Replace engine air filt
235. e and business The name of the authorized dealer and city where located The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attemptin some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive arefund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a
236. e as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by applying light pressure to the brake pedal while moving slowly Note Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Note Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If your vehicle stalls do not try to turn around because this could cause vehicle roll over It is better to reverse back toa safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control E143949 Four Wheel Drive
237. e edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area altel the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for atire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P Type Tires E142543 P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example Wheels and Tires A P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that may be used for service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organiza
238. e gt games Browse lt Sirius category gt channels Browse SD card Browse Sirius channel guide Browse USB Help If you only say Browse you can then say any commands in the following chart This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio BROWSE lt League gt Games lt Sirius category gt channels SD card Sirius Channel Guide USB Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command For example if you are listening to music on a USB device then want to switch to a satellite radio channel simply press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the SIRIUS station such as the Highway The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which current audio source you are listening to such as a USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio Note This is only available when your MyFord Touch system language is set to North American English Sample commands lt 87 7 107 9 gt lt 530 1710 gt lt Channel name gt AM lt 530 1710 gt FM lt 87 7 107 9 gt Play album lt name gt Play artist lt name gt Play genre lt name gt Play playlist lt name gt Help This command is only usable if you have a
239. e reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength again If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each station These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate 340 analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to MyFord Touch it equipped Potential station issues Cause Action Echo stutter skip or repeat in audio Increase or decrease in audio volume This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster No action required This is a broadcast issue Sound fading
240. e sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ ously stored wireless network You can categorize by alphabetical listing priority and signal strength You can also choose to search for anetwork connect to anetwork disconnect from a network receive more information prioritize a network or delete a network Gateway Access Point Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things such as game playing file transfer and internet browsing Press for more information Gateway Access Point Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway Gateway Access Point Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi Fi system Instead of using Wi Fi your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on You can select the following Country Carrier Phone Number User Name and Password Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect disconne
241. e system always offers the last detected parking space i e if the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving it offers the last one Note f driven above approximately 20 mph 35 km h the touch screen shows a message to alert you to reduce vehicle speed 153 Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note f vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph 10 km h the system switches off and you need to take full control of the vehicle Note f a maneuver is interrupted before completion the system switches off The steering wheel position will not indicate the actual position of the steering and you have to full take control of the vehicle With your hands off the wheel and nothing obstructing its movement and the transmission in R Reverse the vehicle steers itself as instructions to safely move the vehicle back and forward in the space are displayed in the touch screen While reversing the touch screen displays a message instructing you to check your surroundings for safety reasons and to back up slowly accompanied by a corresponding graphic Parking Aids a When you think the vehicle has enough space in front and behind it or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid bring the vehicle to a complete stop Len E130109 When automatic steering is finished the driving above approximately 20 mph touchscreen displays a message indicating 35 km h for 30 seconds during an that the active p
242. e system does not recog nize them If a contact is in CAPS you have to spell it JAKE requires you to say Call J A K E 319 MyFord Touch f Equipped GENERAL INFORMATION E161891 Q m m O 0O Up WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Phone Navigation or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Climate Settings Home Information Entertainment 320 MyFord Touch it equipped This system uses a four corner strategy to provide quick access to several vehicle features and settings The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone multimedia climate control and navigation system The corners display any active modes within those menus such as phone status or the climate temperature Note Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving Note You can also directly access the Home screen and Information screen by pressing the Home house icon and Information
243. e your own personal judgment while driving If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver 388 places you in an unsafe situation or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe do not follow such instructions c do not input destinations or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software unless your vehicle is stationary and parked d do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal unauthorized unintended unsafe hazardous or unlawful purposes or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement e arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device such as an airbag You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above 2 Account Information You agree a when registering the TeleNav Software to provide TeleNav with true accurate current and complete information about yourself and b to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information and to keep it true accurate current and complete 3 Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms o
244. eam headlamp supply F75 15A Fog lamp supply F76 10A Reversing lamp supply F77 20A Washer pump F78 5A Ignition switch Start button F79 15A Radio Navigation DVD player Touch screen Hazard light switch Door lock switch F80 20A Moonroof supply F81 5A Radio frequency receiver F82 20A Washer pump ground F83 20A Central locking ground F84 20A Drive door unlock ground F85 7 5A Electronic 15 feed 202 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amprating Protected components F86 10A Air bag module Occupant classification system Passenger air bag deactivation indicator F87 7 5A Not used spare F88 25A Supply for F67 F69 F71 and F79 F89 Not used Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is in the luggage compartment behind the passenger side wheel well Remove the fuse panel cover to gain access to the fuses E129927 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components Fl 5A Hands free liftgate entry module F2 10A Keyless vehicle module F3 5A Keyless vehicle door handles F4 25A Door control unit front left F5 25A Door control unit front right F6 25A Door control unit rear left F7 25A Door control unit rear right 203 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F8 Not used F9 25A Driver seat moto
245. ear of combustibles Make sure the heater heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes 127 Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary The heater uses 0 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use The system does not have a thermostat It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity Fuel and Refueling SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel capless fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled The flow of fuel through a fuel
246. econds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth CLEANING LEATHER SEATS ir EQUIPPED For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution Dry the area with a soft cloth In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors Note 70 check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather You should remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner clean spills and stains as quickly as possible check for compatibility by first testing any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather oil petroleum based leather conditioners household cleaners alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber vinyl and plastics CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS F EQUIPPED Note Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers Note Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers Note ndustrial strength or heavy duty cleaners in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt
247. ect to have the system search by certain music categories such as Rock Pop or Country RBDS RDS Select to view additional broadcast data if available This feature defaults to off RBDS must be on for you to set a category SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS to activate modify or track your account Select to view available satellite radio channels Press OK to open alist of the following options for this channel Tune Channel Skip Channel or Lock Channel Once you skip or lock a channel you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN 277 Audio System SIRIUS Set Category Select to view channel categories such as Pop Rock or News If you select a category seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs artists or teams The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel Save up to 20 alerts Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations Skip No stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped Parental Lock PIN Select to create a PIN which allows you to lock or unlock channels Your initial PIN is 1234
248. ects from touching the coded key while starting the engine Switch the ignition off move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle SecuriLock The system is an engine immobilization system It is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting A message may appear in the information display If you are unable to start the engine witha correctly coded key a malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information display Automatic Arming The vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off Automatic Disarming Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement Keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote control The intelligent access key functions asa programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start system as well as aremote control If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded ke
249. ed Press the large fan icon to increase the fan speed press the small fan icon to decrease the fan speed Pressing one of the fan speed buttons while in AUTO takes the system out of AUTO fan mode On and off button Press to turn the system on or off MAX Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents You can use this mode to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Automatically turns on rear window defroster and heated mirrors Press this button again to return to the previous airflow selection MAX A C Press to distribute recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle Air conditioning automatically turns on the fan speed automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the temperature display returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning Recirculated air may help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle 102 Climate Control Temperature Control E133115 You can set the temperature between Recirculated air Press to turn air recirculation in cabin on or off Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when you select MAX A C or manually in any airflow mode except defrost Recirculated air may turn off
250. ed and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data any of which may lead to incorrect results No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is and you agree to use it at your own risk NT and its licensors and their licensors and suppliers make no guarantees representations or warranties of any kind express or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to content quality accuracy completeness effectiveness reliability fitness for a particular purpose Usefulness use or results to be obtained from this Data or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free Disclaimer of Warranty NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED OF QUALITY PERFORMANCE MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you Disclaimer of Liability NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS INJURY OR DAMAGES DIRECT OR INDIRECT WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL
251. ed height repeat the above procedure Once you open the power liftgate you can manually move it to a different height When operating the power liftgate after you have programmed a lower height than full open you can fully open the liftgate by manually pushing it upward to the maximum open position Locks Obstacle Detection When Closing The system stops when it detects an obstacle and two short tones sound Once you remove the obstacle you can power close the liftgate Note Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection To prevent this let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle Before driving off check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving When Opening The system stops when it detects an obstacle and two short tones sound Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate KEYLESS ENTRY 1FEQUIPPED SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD The keypad is located near the driver window It is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note f you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Re enter your entry code more slowly 62 E138637 You can use the keypad to lock or unlock the doo
252. ed menu Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook call history text messages and paired devices 1 Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the display 2 Press OK to confirm Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC phonebook call history text messages and paired devices and return to the factory default settings Press OK to select The display indicates when complete and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Install Application Delete All Devices Install applications you have downloaded Press OK and scroll to select Press OK to confirm Delete all previously paired phones and all information originally saved with those phones Press OK to select System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number 300 SYNCTM If you select You can Press OK to select MAP Profile Thisis a Bluetooth component which can further help your phone with the exchange of text messages Return Exit the current menu SYNCTM APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES In order for the following features to work your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC To check your phone s compatibility visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca SYNC Services Provides access to traffic directions and inf
253. ed rear window CABIN AIR FILTER Note Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times This prevents foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system Your cabin air filter is located under the instrument panel in the passenger footwell area The particulate filtration system reduces the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air supplied to the interior of your vehicle The particulate filtration system gives you and your passengers the following benefits It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration It improves the interior compartment cleanliness It protects the climate control components from particle deposits Replace the filter at regular intervals See the Scheduled Maintenance chapter For more information about your filter see an authorized dealer REMOTE START iF EQUIPPED The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote start Climate Control You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation Turn the ignition on to return the system toits previous settings You can now make adjustments You will need to turn certain vehicle dependent features back on such as heated seats heated mirrors heated rear window You can adjust the settings using the information display controls See Information Disp
254. ed to the on position The driver s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding Then The safety belt warning light illuminates 1 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off The driver s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on posi tion The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off 30 Safety Belts SAFETY BELT MINDER Belt Minder This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light when the driver s or front passenger s seat is occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for about five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature If Then The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled
255. ee 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST 194 Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Manual French Owner s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Awww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 E142557 Customer Assistance You can also obtain other information REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
256. eemed to be terms of limitation but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words without limitation 9 Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users This Agreement includes end user terms applicable to these companies included at the end of this Agreement and thus your use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions which are applicable to TeleNav s third party vendor licensors NavTeq End User License Agreement END USER TERMS The content provided Data is licensed not sold By opening this package or installing copying or otherwise using the Data you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement you are not permitted to install copy use resell or transfer the Data If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement and have not Appendices installed copied or used the Data you must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America LLC NT within thirty 30 days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price To contact NT please visit www navteqg com The Data is provided for your personal internal use only and may not be resold It is protected by copyright and is subject to the following terms this End User License Agreement
257. el vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling Fuel and Refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container Place approved fuel container on the ground Do not fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling Do not use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury When fueling your vehicle 1 Putthe vehicle in P Park and turn the ignition off 2 Open the fuel filler door E156032 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel syste
258. elayed accessory relay RO Not used R10 Mini relay Starter relay R11 Micro relay Air conditioner clutch R12 Power relay Cooling fan R13 Mini relay Heater blower R14 Mini relay Engine control relay R15 Power relay Heated rear window R16 Power relay Ignition 15 Mini fuses Cartridge fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is on the right side below the glove box 200 Fuses E129926 Es ey i Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F56 20A Fuel pump supply Air mass meter F57 Not used F58 5A Not used spare F59 5A Passive anti theft transceiver F60 10A Interior light Driver door switch pack Glove boxillumination Overhead console switch bank Cigar lighter Power point 201 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F62 5A Rain sensor module Auto dimming mirror F63 10A Not used spare F64 Not used F65 10A Liftgate release F66 20A Driver door unlock supply F67 7 5A SYNC Multifunction display Global posi tioning system module F68 Not used F69 5A Instrument cluster F70 20A Central lock and unlock supply F71 10A Heating control head manual air condi tioner Dual electronic automatic temperature control F72 7 5A Steering wheel module F73 7 5A Data link connector F74 15A High b
259. elect from the following options Repeat This feature replays the currently playing song or album Shuffle Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder in random order Similar Music This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing More Info Touch this button to see disc information such as current track artist name album and genre Options Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings which is under Media Player See Settings page 327 Device Information displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device Update Media Index indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and each time the content changes such as adding or removing tracks to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device Browse This feature allows you to view the contents of the device It also allows you to search by categories such as genre artist or album If you want to view song information such as Title Artist File Folder Album and Genre touch the on screen album art You can also touch
260. en customize the voice recognition system to D Push the voice icon Say Voice provide more or less instruction and te settings when prompted then feedback any of the following When you say The system Interaction mode standard Provides more detailed interaction and guidance Interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts The system defaults to the standard interaction mode Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request For example the system may ask Phone is that correct If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and may ask you to confirm settings When you say The system Confirmation prompts off Makes a best guess from the command you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings Confirmation prompts on Clarifies your voice command with a short question For example say Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home Say 2 after the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile Say 3 after the tone to call Jane Doe at home You could also say Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe Say 2 after the tone to play Johnny Doe The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command When turned on it may prompt you with as many as four
261. en On and Off 2 Make a selection and then press OK Delete a paired media device 1 Press OK and scroll to select the device 2 Press OK to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices Press OK to select Return Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features Advanced Menu Options 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu The Advanced menu allows you to access 2 Scroll to System Settings Press OK and set prompts languages defaults and 3 Scroll to Advanced Press OK perform a master reset When you select You can Prompts Have SYNC guide you by asking questions helpful hints or ask you for a specific action 1 Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Languages Choose from English Fran ais or Espa ol The displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 313 SYNCTM When you select You can 3 If you change the language setting the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Fac
262. en the pairing is successful 4 5 355 SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s manual and visit the website Making Calls Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls When us ES prompted say Call lt name gt or say Dial then the desired number in Receiving Calls To end the call or exit phone mode press this phone button During an incoming call an audible tone sounds Call information appears in the display if it is available Accept the call by pressing RS Accept on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls Reject the call by pressing Ignore the call by doing nothing SYNC logs it as a missed call Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options Phone Touch this button to access the on screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call During an active call you can also choose to Mute the call Put the call on hold Turn on the privacy feature MyFord Touch f Equipped Join two calls End the call Quick Dial Set up favorite contacts from you phonebook or history folder Phonebook Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phone book The system pla
263. eneral Information page 88 REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle See Passive Anti Theft System page 64 To re program the passive anti theft system see an authorized dealer 48 MyKeyTM PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as administrator keys or admin keys These can be used to create a MyKey program configurable MyKey settings clear all MyKey features When you have programmed a MyKey you can access the following information using the information display How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey Note All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings You cannot program them individually Note For vehicles with intelligent access with push button start when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key fob are present the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle while switching the ignition on to start the vehicle Non configurable Settings The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user 49 Belt Minder You cannot
264. ent Access Transmitter 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter Sal E142432 2 Twista thin coin under the tab hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key s E138622 Remove the old battery Insert a new battery with the facing downward Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key Car Finder Press the button twice within A three seconds The horn will sound and the turn signals will flash We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm 46 Keys and Remote Controls Note f locking was not successful or if any door or the liftgate is open or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash Sounding a Panic Alarm Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Press the button to activate the E gt alarm Press the button again or turn the ignition on to deactivate Remote Start if Equipped WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel EN Theremote start buttonisonthe trans
265. eployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required Supplementary Restraints System SOS POST CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn intermittently in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The horn and lamps will turn off when the hazard control button is pressed the panic button if equipped is pressed on the remote entry transmitter or your vehicle runs out of power DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNINGS Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back 36 E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes The driver and passenger f
266. er km At 100000 miles 160000 Change engine coolant km Every 100000 miles Replace spark plugs 160000 km Inspect accessory drive belt s Change automatic transmission fluid E 150000 mil 240000 km ee Replace accessory drive belt s Replace timing belt 1 6L engine Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the last engine oil and filter change Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers then every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers After initial inspection inspect every other oil change until replaced If not replaced within the last 100000 miles 160000 kilometers 405 Scheduled Maintenance SPECIAL OPERATING so a ere Lis 7 ollowing tables when specified or within CONDITIONS SCHEDULED 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the OIL MAINTENANCE CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display If you operate your vehicle primarily in any Example 1 The OIL CHANGE of the following conditions you need to REQUIRED message comes on at perform extra maintenance as indicated 28751 miles 46270 kilometers If you operate your vehicle occasionally Perform the 30000 mile under any of these conditions it is not 48000 kilometer automatic necessary to perform the extra maintenance For specific transmission fluid replacement reco
267. er and others K Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire See the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle L Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 Wheels and Tires Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel M Maximum Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is
268. er in this section PHONE Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system See SYNC page 286 MEDIA Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the SYNC Media menu To change the SYNC Media device such as switching from a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device press MENU and scroll to Select Source O SIRIUS Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio P RADIO Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH PREMIUM AM FM CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen Note The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features See MyFord Touch page 320 Audio System E143843 A Q A B i D u E nN A SEEK Di i mee SOURCE 7 F E TUNE Press
269. er off When you shift into R Reverse the rear wiper will switch on to intermittent if the front wipers are activated Rear Window Washer n a E168044 The washer will spray for as long as you push the lever away from you When you release the lever the wiper will operate for a short time 72 Lighting LIGHTING CONTROL E142449 A Off B Parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps High Beams E162679 Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off Headlamp Flasher E162680 Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps AUTOLAMPS F EQUIPPED Note t may be necessary to switch your headlamps on manually in severe weather conditions E142451 The headlamps will switch on and off automatically in low light situations or during inclement weather The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off You can adjust the time delay using the information display controls See Information Displays page 88 Lighting Note f you switch autolamps on in Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps conjunction with autowipers low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically A B when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note
270. er portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 2 Vehicle Care 4 Remove the soaked cloth andifitisnot soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 s
271. er than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your warranty information for complete details Fuel and Refueling On Board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD I
272. er the system has cooled down a message will be displayed briefly in the information display See Information Messages page 91 When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Four Wheel Drive it Equipped Avoid driving at excessive speeds this causes vehicle momentum to work against you and your vehicle could become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and Water Mud Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even four wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud If your vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts can cause an imbalance that could damage drive components Water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth and avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims If the ignition system gets wet your vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop your vehicl
273. ere available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information anda guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen 279 The multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HDI signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as amemory preset Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the so
274. ered on the shoulder and chest Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt Types of Booster Seats E68924 Backless booster seats 17 Child Safety If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat E70710 E142596 High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The following drawings compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck anda shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips Child Safety E142597
275. erminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cab e from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cab e from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the battery can recharge 189 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away From Home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United S
276. ertain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus Message indicator if Equipped The message indicator li illuminates to supplement some messages It will be red or amber depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified Some messages will be supplemented by a system specific symbol with a message indicator Airbag Message Message Action Indicator Airbag fault Service now Amber Displays when the system requires service due to a malfunction Contact your authorized dealer Information Displays Alarm Message Message Action Indicator Alarm activated Check Amber Displays when the alarm has been triggered Vehicle due to unauthorized entry See Anti Theft Alarm page 65 Alarm fault Service required Displays when the system requires service due to a malfunction Contact your authorized dealer Battery and Charging System Message Message Action Indicator Electrical system over Red Stop your vehicle as soon asit is safe to do so voltage Stop safely and switch off the ignition Contact your authorized dealer Battery low See manual Amber Displays to warn of a low battery condition Turn off all unneeded electrical accessories Contact your authorized dealer Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Message Action Indicator BLIS Low visibili
277. es not allow transfer or resale of the Data except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if a you retain no copies of the Data b the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement and c you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media e g the CD ROM or DVD you purchased all original packaging all Manuals and other documentation Specifically Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof Additional License Limitations Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement and without limiting the preceding paragraph your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement and you may not a use this Data with any products systems or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation positioning dispatch real time route guidance fleet managementor similar applications or b with or in communication with including without limitation cellular phones palmtop and handheld computers pagers and personal digital assistants or PDAs Appendices WARNING This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circumstances sources us
278. ess and release SET 3 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Changing the Set Speed Press and hold SET or SET Release the control when you reach the desired speed Press and release SET or SET The set speed will change in approximately 1mph 2 km h increments Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed Press and release SET Canceling the Set Speed Pull CAN toward you and release or tap the brake pedal The set speed will not be erased Resuming the Set Speed Pull RES toward you and release Switching Cruise Control Off Note You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off Driving Aids BLIND SPOT MONITOR Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert it Equipped WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as areplacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS isnot areplacement for careful driving and only an assist ae CD BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 3 meters beyond the bumper The system is designed to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you of
279. ey from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition 8 Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the engine and operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter If programming was not successful wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8 If you are still unsuccessful take your vehicle to your authorized dealer Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key See your authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle ANTI THEFT ALARM iF EQUIPPED The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle It will be triggered if any door the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key remote control or keyless entry keypad The direction indicators will flash and the horn will sou
280. eyTM CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey 1 Insert the key you want to program into the ignition If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start hold the intelligent access key next to the steering column Details on the correct fob placement and position is in another chapter See Starting and Stopping the Engine page 123 2 Switch the ignition on 3 Access the main menu on the information display controls and select Settings and then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button 4 Press OK or the gt button to select Create MyKey 5 When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey The key will be restricted at your vehicle s next start MyKey is successfully created Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys You can also program configurable settings for the key s Refer to Programming Changing Configurable Settings Programming Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings 1 Switch the ignition on using an admin key or fob 2 Access the main menu on the information display controls and select Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button 3 Use the arrow buttons to get to a configurable feature 4 Press OK or gt to make a selection Note You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the
281. f Pick up Trucks and Utility type Vehicles Vehicle Loading with and without a Trailer Locking and Unlocking Activating Intelligent Access Autolock Battery Saver Illuminated Entry 58 Illuminated Exit 58 Mechanical Key 56 Opening a Rear Door from Inside 56 Power Door Locks Remote Control Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Eanan U emmener Luggage COVErS 166 Lug Nuts See Changing a Road Wheel 255 M Maintenance General Information Manual Climate Control Manual Liftgate Closing the Liftgate Opening the Liftgate Manual Seats T11 Adjusting the Height of the Driver s SOA EAA P E EAE 11 Recline Adjustmen Media Hub Memory Function Saving a Pre Set Position 114 Message Center See Information Displays 88 Mirrors See Heated Windows and Mirrors 107 See Windows and Mirrors Mobile Communications Equipment Moonroof Bounce Back Opening and Closing the Moonroof Opening and Closing the Sunscreen Venting the Moonroof Motorcraft Parts MyFord Touch General Information MyKey Troubleshooting MyKey Principle of Operation 420 Navigation cityseekr Quick touch Buttons Setting a Destination Setting Your Navigation Preferences Normal Scheduled Maintenance Intelligent Oil Life Monitor Maintenance Intervals O Oil Check See Engine Oil Check Opening and Closing th
282. f gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Take extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle The maximum recommended load evenly distributed on the crossbars is 100 pounds 45 kilograms for vehicles without a moonroof 45 pounds 20 kilograms for vehicles with a moonroof Note Never place loads directly on the roof panel The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load For correct roof rack system function you must place loads directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails When using the roof rack system we recommend you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle Make sure that you securely fasten the load Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop Adjusting the Crossbar if Equipped Note For less wind noise and better aerodynamics only install the crossbars when you need them for carrying cargo If you prefer to keep the crossbars installed the front crossbar has two positions The front position is quieter for wind noise The rear position may help to reduce wind noise from an open moonroof Follow the steps to reposition or remove the front crossbar You can remove the rear crossbar fasteners by unscrewing the assembly E142448 1 Remove the crossbar thumbwheels at both sides of the front
283. f this Agreement TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal non exclusive non transferable license except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license without the right to sublicense to use the TeleNav Software in object code form only in order to access and use the TeleNav Software This license shall terminate upon Appendices any termination or expiration of this Agreement You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties 3 1 License Limitations You agree not to do any of the following a reverse engineer decompile disassemble translate modify alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof b attempt to derive the source code audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav c remove from the TeleNav Software or alter any of TeleNav s or its suppliers trademarks trade names logos patent or copyright notices or other notices or markings d distribute sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software or e use the TeleNav Software in any manner that i infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any par
284. f you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting E142452 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you You will hear a short tone The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or Press repeatedly or press and hold until switching the ignition on the desired level is reached E132712 74 Lighting DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS cir EQUIPPED WARNING Always remember to switch your headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp system does not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision To switch the Daytime Running Lamp system on 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Switch the lighting control to the off autolamp or parking lamp position Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps The Daytime Running Lamp system switches the low beam headlamps on at a reduced intensity in day light co
285. fety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible To reduce the risk of serious injury when mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again Wheels and Tires WARNINGS When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and
286. ficient than two wheel drive operation Close windows for high speed driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER Note Driving through deep water above the recommended levels can cause vehicle damage If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks E142667 When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 184 FLOOR MATS E142666 WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle Floor mats must be properly secured to b
287. fluid needs to be changed However a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your dealership should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately Make sure to change your vehicle s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six month intervals Scheduled Maintenance Check every month Engine oil level Function of all interior and exterior lights Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Windshield washer fluid level Check every six months Battery connections Clean if necessary Body and door drain holes for obstructions Clean if necessary Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Door weatherstrips for wear Lubricate if necessary Hinges latches and outside locks for proper operation Lubricate if necessary Parking brake for proper operation Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function Safety warning lamps brake ABS air
288. ftware or service providers their affiliates or suppliers PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FORD MOTOR COMPANY ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFT WARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE 386 Adobe Contains Adobe Flash Player or AIR technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated This Licensee Product contains Adobe Flash Player Adobe AIR software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2009
289. g This feature is only available on vehicles with active park assist Fixed guidelines Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you Centerline Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object for example a trailer Parking Aids Note f the transmission is in R Reverse and the luggage compartment is ajar no rear view camera features are displayed Note f the image comes on while the transmission is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer Note When towing the camera only sees what is being towed behind your vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen In some vehicles the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged Note The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating The camera s view is obstructed by mud water or debris Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged causing the camera to become misaligned To access any of the rear view camera system settings make the following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R Revers
290. g this indicates a malfunction Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off Check the engine oil level See Engine Oil Check page 211 Note Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Fasten Safety Belt It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt See Safety Belt Minder page 31 Instrument Cluster Fog Lamps Front if Equipped It will illuminate when you switch D the front fog lamps on High Beam It will illuminate when you switch the high beam headlamps on It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher Information it Equipped It will illuminate when a new G message is stored in the information display It will be red or amber in color depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified See Information Messages page 91 Low Fuel Level It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty Refuel as soon as possible Low Tire Pressure Warning It will illuminate when your tire H pressure is low If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving check your tire pressure as soon as possible It will also illuminate momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional If it does not
291. g and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer 97 Information Displays Power Steering Message Message Action Indicator Steering loss Stop safely Red The power steering systemis not working Stop the vehicle a safe place Contact your author ized dealer Steering assist fault Amber The power steering system is not working Stop Service required the vehicle a safe place Contact your author ized dealer Steering fault Service Amber The power steering system has detected a now condition within the power steering system or passive entry or passive start system requires service Contact your authorized dealer Starting System Message Message Action Indicator Press brake to start Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake Cranking time exceeded Displays when the vehicle fails to start Transmission and Four Wheel Drive Message Message Action Indicator Transmission fault See your authorized dealer Service now Transmission overtem Amber The transmission is overheating and needs to perature Stop safely cool Stop in a safe place as soon as it s possible Transmission Service Amber See your authorized dealer required Transmission Hot Stop or Speed Up Transmission is getting hot Stop to let it cool or speed up
292. ged You can now adjust the driver s side and passenger s side temperatures independently The display shows the temperature settings for each side Switching Back to Single Zone Temperature Control Press and hold AUTO for 2 4 seconds The passenger s side temperature switches to the driver s side temperature setting Climate Control HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE General Hints Note Prolonged use ofrecirculated air may cause the windows to fog up Note You may feel a small amount of air from the floor air vents regardless of the air distribution setting Note 70 reduce humidity build up inside your vehicle do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on Note Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats Note Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield Heating the Interior Quickly Manual Climate Control Note 70 reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position Increase the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing if required Automatic Climate Control Note Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible For
293. ging devices and portable two way radios Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Manual A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Manual is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Manual for all other required information and warnings Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children WARNINGS Always make sure your child is
294. ging the air filter element use only the air filter element listed See Capacities and Specifications page 261 For EcoBoost equipped vehicles When servicing the air cleaner it is important that 1 no foreign material enter the air induction system The engine and turbocharger are E142711 susceptible to damage from even small 2 particles Change the air filter element at the proper 3 interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 4 Note Failure to use the correct air filter 5 element may result in severe engine j damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 6 219 Loosen the screws on the air tube clamp that fasten it to the air filter assembly tray Separate the clean air tube from the air cleaner Remove the air cleaner from the vehicle Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing For 2 5L engines disengage the clips that secure the air filter housing cover For 1 6L and 2 0L engines remove the screws securing the air filter housing cover Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing Maintenance 7 9 10 T 12 Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and to make sure you have a good seal Slide the open end of the air filter element in first below the tab Then push the closed end cap into th
295. gs or enter data non verbally using your hands while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations This is important since while setting Up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel General Operation Voice Command Control Functions within the Windows Automotive based system may be accomplished using only voice commands Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel Prolonged Views of Screen Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time Volume Setting Do not raise the volume excessively Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident Use of Speech Recognition Functions Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors Navigation Features A
296. hange the SYNC Media device such as switching from a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device press MENU and scroll to Select Source RADIO Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH AM FM CD SYNC SATELLITE RADIO WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving 272 Note You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition Press the ON OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off The system automatically turns off after one hour Note Some features such as SIRIUS satellite radio may not be available in your location Check with an authorized dealer Audio System E162869 OM Eject Press this button to eject a CD Cursor arrows Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices OK Press this button to c
297. he left or right sensor the BLIS telltale illuminates and remains on and the following will appear in the information display BLIS X sensor fault Service req d or Cross Traffic malfunction Service req d Switching the Systems Off and On One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the information display control See General Information page 88 When the BLIS is switched off you will not receive alerts and a telltale illuminates in the information display The system switches back on whenever the ignition is switched on One or both systems can also be switched off permanently at your authorized dealer Once switched off switching it back on must also be done at your authorized dealer Driving Aids ECO MODE This system assists you in driving more efficiently by constantly monitoring characteristics of gear changing anticipation of traffic conditions and speeds while driving The value of these characteristics is represented by petals shown in the display with five petals being the most efficient The more efficiently you drive the better the rating and the better your overall fuel economy Note These efficiency values do not result in a defined fuel consumption figure It might vary as it is not only related to these driving habits but also influenced by many other factors such as short trips and cold starts Note Frequent short trips where the engine does not fully warm up will als
298. he restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions for example crash severity belt usage were not appropriate to activate these safety devices The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near frontal crashes not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if your vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if your vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation ora certain likelihood of rollover AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel 43 Keys and Remote Controls GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
299. he steering wheel and when prompted say Vehicle health report Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose Paul s Phone E146988 your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information CLIMATE Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features Depending on your vehicle line and option package your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here 0 3 Miles A Power Touch to switch the system off and on Outside air cannot enter your vehicle when you switch off the system B Passenger settings Touch or to adjust the temperature O Fan speed Touch or to adjust fan speed D DUAL Touch to switch on the passenger temperature control 368 MyFord Touch it equipped Recirculated air Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which may reduce the amount of time needed to co
300. he total fuel tank size it is the combined usable capacity plus the empty reserve Filling the Tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank Turn the ignition off before fueling an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running Use the same fill rate low medium high each time the tank is filled Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers of driving this is your engine s break in period a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles 3000 miles 3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers Also fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy 1 Fillthe fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 2 Eachtime you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added 3 After at least three to five tank fill Ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading Fuel and Refueling 5 Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used For Metric Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled Keep arecord for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This provides an accurate estim
301. heel and tire assembly information for a description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 245 Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged inthe tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected incase it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following co
302. hicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 262 Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION C Make vehicle line series body NUMBER type ae ae D Engine type The vehicle identification number is located on the left hand side of the E Check digit instrument panel F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142476 Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO nar DATE _XX XX GVWR XXXX KG XXXX LB er WOOO KE NK LB wir OU KG Doe WITH The Vehicle Identification Number contains OOA ES DEAN TRES ina ian XX RIMS 0000 IMS the following information NNN kPa XXX PSICOLD AT OO KPa XXX PSICOLD HIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX MN XXXXXXXXXXXHHHHHK png XXX ATR he TR TE a ry ere A XX OX X XX XX XXXX A B CDEFG X0000000000 XXE XXKKEXKKKKKNEK E167469 E142477 A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Restraint Devices and their locations 263 Capacities and Specifications The National Highway Traffic Safety TRANSMISSION CODE Administratio
303. hicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations The rating for the tow vehicle s braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating not the gross combined weight rating Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds 680 kilograms when loaded Trailer Lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle s tail lamp wiring this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation Additional electrical equipment may be required Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Towing Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle trailer combination before starting on a trip When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles When Towing a Trailer Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 k
304. hile your vehicle is moving E149149 284 The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through your vehicle speakers You can use any portable music player designed for use with headphones Your audio extension cable must have male 1 8th inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at each end 1 Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the auxiliary input jack Switch the radio on Select either a tuned FM station or a CD Adjust the volume as desired Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its maximum level Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display You should hear music from your device even if it is low Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls USB PORT 1FEQUIPPED E142604 Audio System The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and charge devices if supported See SYNC page 286 MEDIA HUB iF ecouippreD The media hub is located in the center console and has the following features QWQ Eu A A V inputs B SD card slot C USB ports See MyFord Touch page 320 285 SYNCTM
305. hould then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system Protect against freezing temperatures When removing your vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Vehicle Care Note f battery cables are disconnected it Contact your authorized dealer if you have will be necessary to reset memory features any concerns or issues Brakes Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 meters every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing Vehicle From Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces Check windshield wipers for any deterioration Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests Check the exhaust for any fore
306. iciently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information SYNCTM System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist Vehic
307. id should be checked by an authorized dealer If required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill Maintenance FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING If you operate your vehicle in tem
308. ie ES 2 x Interior luggage compartment k release t w Q Keep out of reach of children eit Lighting control C sll z Introduction 1 Low tire pressure warning e Maintain correct fluid level Note operating instructions Panic alarm Parking aid Parking brake Power steering fluid Power windows front rear Power window lockout Service engine soon Side airbag Shield the eyes Stability control 10 3 0 2 felere Sa Windshield wash and wipe DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Additionally when your vehicle is in for service or repair Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes For U S only if equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be acces
309. ie ntellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener Note 70 program Home Link to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode 118 E142661 A B Red indicator light Green indicator light 1 Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light will change from green to red and green Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode If done properly the indicator light will appear red Hold the transmitter within 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters of the button onthe visor you want to program Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter and the button you want to program The indicator light on the visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful Note The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode To do this Universal Garage Door Opener if Equipped 1 Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indi
310. ies such as artist and album SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune Plays from device players and most USB drives SYNC also supports audio formats such as MP3 WMA WAV and ACC Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note f your digital media player has a power switch make sure you switch it on before plugging it in To Connect Using Voice Commands 1 Plug the device into the USB port 2 Press the voice icon and when prompted say USB 3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands See the media voice commands To Connect Using the System Menu 1 Plug the device into the USB port 2 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu 3 Scroll to Select Source Press OK 4 Scroll to USB Press OK 5 Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected device Indexing may appear in the radio display When indexing is complete the screen returns to the Play menu 307 Press OK and scroll through selections of Play All Albums Genres Playlists Tracks Explore USB Similar Music Return What s Playing At any time when a track is playing you can press the voice icon and ask the system What s playing The system reads the metadata tags if populated of the playing track to you Media Voice Commands Press the voice icon When ns prompted say USB then any of the following
311. ights see your authorized dealer 226 Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B DorF Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrates U S only ZC 32 Al or ZC 32 B1 Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 227 CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Neve
312. ign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive your vehicle 15 feet 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect 233 Wheels and Tires GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners WARNINGS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers drive at safe speeds for the conditions keep tires properly inflated never overload or improperly load your vehicle and make sure every passenger is properly restrained In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Do not become overconfident in the ability of four wheel drive vehicles Although a four wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed
313. ilometers Do not make full throttle starts Check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles 80 kilometers When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A C performance Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow Haul feature use this feature when towing This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling 180 Allow more distance for stopping with atrailer attached Anticipate stops and brake gradually Avoid parking on a grade However if you must park on a grade Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow Set your vehicle parking brake Place the automatic transmission in position P Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels Chocks not included with vehicle Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Note Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
314. imitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an event data recorder special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment canread the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order 10 or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Note ncluding to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist ma
315. in systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note This feature is only available in the United States 303 Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note n order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Note Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The vehicle health report
316. increase the risk of injury in crashes 28 All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible See Child Safety page 14
317. ing on the plan you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as Rental reimbursement Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers Note Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage This information is subject to change For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you 399 Scheduled Maintenance GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why Maintain Your Vehicle Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your
318. ir EQUIPPED WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged adapters There is a risk of electrical shock Note The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below O F 18 C Starting and Stopping the Engine The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant This allows the climate control system to respond quickly The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt AC electrical source We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors in cold temperatures and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not use multiple extension cords Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water This could cause an electric shock or fire Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area cl
319. ir investigation by e mail Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership by calling1 800 NAVMAPS in Mexico call 01 800 557 5539 or going to www navigation com ford You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available Navigation Voice Commands When in navigation mode press us the voice button on the steering wheel controls After the tone say any of the following commands Navigation system voice commands Cancel next waypoint Cancel route n2 Destination Destination lt nametag gt Destination lt POI category gt Destination favorites Destination home MyFord Touch i equipped Navigation system voice commands Navigation system voice commands Destination intersection Zoom out Destination nearest lt POI category gt Help Destination nearest POI Destination play nametags Destination POI Destination POI category Destination previous destination Destination street address Detour These commands are only available when a navigation route is active If you say Destination you can then say any command in the following Destination chart If you say Navigation you can then say any command in the following Navigation chart DESTINATION
320. ireless technology support the following functions Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 354 Pairing Your Phone for the First Time WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone with SYNC This allows you to use your phone in a hands free manner Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen Find SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing process from your device Ma
321. iseniarucincitcas vere 225 Changing a Fuse 196 USES Ans nie 196 Changing a Road Wheel 255 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information Tire Change Procedure 1 6L and 2 0L EcoBoost Engines se 2 51 EB UAE scccasensdcnaixrscrastuiesnsd i 416 Changing the Wiper Blades Checking MyKey System Status Ne Checking the Wiper Blades Child Restraint and Safety Belt Maintenance Child Safety ss 14 General Information Child Safety Locks Left Hand Side Right Hand Side 25 Child Seat Positioning 15 Cleaning Leather Seats 231 Cleaning Products 4227 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels 231 Cleaning the Engine 229 Cleaning the Exteriot 227 Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts 228 Exterior Chrome 227 Stripes or Graphics if equipped 227 WRG SPDODY sscsinsceiassinassvnncesnrnsvavanvarairaasnnneninaseiannis 228 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens 230 Cleaning the Interior Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades ss 229 Clearing All MyKeys 50 Climat 368 Climate Control Voice Commands 369 Climate Control 101 Coolant Check See Engine Coolant Check 212 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator 42 Creating a MYKEV R 50 Programming Changing Configurable SENES piisi onae 50 Cruise Control Principle of Operation Cruise control See Using Cruise Control 159 Customer
322. isse re eee 79 Interior MirrOr sssssrrmeeenenurne 80 SUM VISOS Essen 81 MOONTOO nn 81 Instrument Cluster GAU BOS seen iennennsnens 83 Warning Lamps and Indicators 84 Audible Warnings and Indicators 87 Information Displays General Information 88 Tip COMP Ute psss aeee 90 Information Messages 91 Climate Control Manual Climate Control 101 Automatic Climate Control 102 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate Heated Windows and Mirrors Cabin Air Filter Remote Start ss 107 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position 109 Head Restraints 109 Manual Seats IM Power Seats 12 Memory FUNCTION 113 REA SALSA eme 114 Heated Seats 115 Rear Seat Armrest iitinmene 5 Universal Garage Door Opener Universal Garage Door Openet 0 116 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Points 120 Storage Compartments Center CONSOLE 122 Overhead Console 122 Starting and Stopping the Engine General Information 123 Ignition Switch 123 Keyless Starting 123 Starting a Gasoline Engine 124 Engine Block Heater 126 Fuel and Refueling Safety Precautions 128 Fuel Quality waist 129 Running Out of FUEL 129 RefUelLiING nns 130 Emission Control System 132 Fuel ConsumptiOn ns 134 Table of Contents Transmission Automatic Transmission 136 Hill Start Assist
323. k of serious injury or death after a crash Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in acrash Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information Note f any user turns 911 Assist on or off that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message or icon comes on or both when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature MyFord Touch f Equipped If a crash deploys an airbag excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehi
324. ke sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary MyFord Touch it equipped Note Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears on your device 3 If prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone The display indicates when the pairing is successful SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s manual and visit the website 5 Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen gt Settings gt BT Devices gt Add Device Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s manual if necessary Note Select SYNC and a six digit PIN appears on your device 3 If prompted to enter a PIN on your device it does not support Secure Simple Pairing To pair enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen Skip the next step When prompted on your phone s display confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone The display indicates wh
325. keep the power point caps closed when not in use Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Locations Power points may be found on the center console inside the center console storage bin on the rear of the center console 12V or 110V AC in the rear cargo area if equipped 110 Volt AC Power Point i equipped WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design Doing so my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury Note The power point will turn off when the ignition is switched off or the battery voltage drops below 11 volts The power point is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts It is located on the rear of the center console E143941 Auxiliary Power Points When the indicator light located on the power point is on power point is working ignition is on and a device is plugged in off power point is off ignition is off or no devi
326. l the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six S Sport Moving the gearshift lever to S Sport Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs hilly terrain or mountainous areas This will increase engine RPM during engine braking Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds SelectShift Automatic Transmission if Equipped Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually change gears Transmission To use SelectShift move the gearshift lever into S Sport Use the buttons on the side of your gearshift lever to manually change gears Press the button to upshift Press the button to downshift Note After you have assumed manual control with SelectShift your vehicle will remain in this mode until you return the gearshift lever from S Sport back to D Drive Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart Upshifts when accelerating recom mended for best fuel economy Shift from 1 2 15 mph 24 km h 2 3 25 mph 40 km h 3 4 40 mph 64 km h 4 5 45 mph 72 km h
327. l work Anti Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times 35 consecutive button presses This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity pressing the unlock button on the remote control switching the ignition on unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access 63 Unlocking and Locking the Doors To Unlock the Driver Door Enter the factory set five digit code or your personal code You must press each number within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note All doors will unlock if the two stage unlocking feature is disabled See Locking and Unlocking page 55 To Unlock All Doors Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press 3 4 control within five seconds To Lock All Doors Press and hold 7 8 and 9 0 at the same time with the driver door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first Security PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM Note The system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Vetallic objects electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting problems if they are too close to the key when starting the engine Prevent these obj
328. lation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Wheels and Tires affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and
329. lays page 88 Automatic Settings You can set the climate control to operate in AUTO mode through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Auto The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to 72 F 22 C In hot weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C Cooled seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on previous settings The rear defroster heated mirrors and heated cooled seats do not automatically turn on In cold weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The heated seats and heated steering wheel are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on Last Settings You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Last Settings The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before you turned off the vehicle Heated and Cooled Devices The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices inside the vehicle You can switch these devices on if available and selected to AUTO in the information displays during remote start Heated devices typically switch on during cold weather
330. le for controlling your vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required WARNINGS If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected the system will be deactivated The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake When the system is active your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away ona slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space The system will activate automatically on any slope that will cause significant vehicle rollback Using Hill Start Assist 1 Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed 2 Ifthe sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope the system will activate automatically 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will release autom
331. le Health Report and Traffic Directions and Information Say USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you Initiating a Voice Session following Push the voice icon A tone the display Say any of the If You Want To Bluetooth audio Stream audio from your phone Cancel Cancel the requested action Line in Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack Phone Make calls Services Access the SYNC Services portal SYNC Return to the main menu USB Access the device connected to your USB port Vehicle health report Run a vehicle health report Voice settings Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback Hear a list o mode Help f voice commands available in the current This is an optional feature and available i n the United States only 288 sounds and Listening appears in SYNCTM System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use The system provides feedback through the system You can change these settings audible tones prompts questions and at any time spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level interaction voice settings You can T
332. le Weight Rating of the towing vehicle The Gross Combined Weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with mandatory options driver and front passenger weight 150 pounds 68 kilograms each no cargo weight internal 173 or external and a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer Consult an authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5000 pound 2268 kilogram conventional trailer multiply 5000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds 227 to 340 kilograms For an 11500 pound 5216 kilogram fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds 782 to 1304 kilograms WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the ee Compliance Certification abel Load Carrying WARNINGS Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires
333. le with an integrated keyhead transmitter you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter you must press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle Keys and Remote Controls The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically The parking lamps will remain on and the vehicle will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration If the duration is set to last 10 minutes the duration will extend by another 10 minutes For example if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes the vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 20 minutes You can only extend the remote start once Some late build vehicles may be able to restart up to 30 minutes Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once The 2X parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display See G
334. lers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Your vehicle may have electrical items such as fuses or relays related to towing See the Fuses chapter Your vehicle s load capacity designation is by weight not by volume So you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components periodically during and after any towing operation 176 Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected the trailer frame should be level or slightly angled down toward your ae when viewed from the side When driving with a trailer or payload a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased
335. less of whether the key is in the ignition or not Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys if Equipped This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control with the door open vehicle in park and ignition off your vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after you close the door If you vehicle finds a key all of the doors will immediately unlock In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking areaon the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control all doors will lock then unlock if the ignition is on Autolock If Equipped The autolock feature will lock all the doors when all doors are closed the ignition is on you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion and your vehicle attains a speed greater than 4 mph 7 km h Autounlock If Equipped The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when the ignition is on all the doors are closed and
336. ligent Access key An admin fob is present at vehicle start No MyKeys are created See Creating a MyKey page 50 54 Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels E138628 A Unlock B Lock Door Lock Indicator An LED on the instrument panel will light when you lock the doors It is not a functional control Remote Control Unlocking the Doors Two Stage Unlock Press the button to unlock the driver door Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors The turn signals will flash 55 Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two stage unlocking Disabling two stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button The turn signals will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode The unlocking mode applies to the remote control keyless entry keypad and intelligent access Intelligent access at the driver door will unlock all doors when you disable two stage unlocking Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all the doors The turn signals will flash Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed The doors will lock again the horn will so
337. lity Control dvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control RSCR tech A A ERR 149 Using SYNC With Your Media P S Using Snow Chains Usi A Media Menu Features Media Voice Commands System Settings Using SYNC With Your Phone 290 Accessing Features through the Phone Accessing Your Phone Settings Making Calle Pairing a Phone for the First Time a Pairing Subsequent Phones Phone Options during an Active Call Phone Voice Commands Receiving Calls System Settings Text Messaging 2o Using Traction Control System Indicator Lights and Messages aea ainsin 147 Using Voice Recognition Initiating a Voice Session 288 System Interaction and Feedback 289 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program Canada Only 192 V Index Vehicle Storage Battery Ventilation See Climate Control 101 VIN See Vehicle Identification Number 263 Voice Control MyFord Touch Controls W Warning Lamps and Indicators Airbag Front Anti Lock Braking System Battery Blind Spot Monitor Brake System Cruise Control Direction Indicator Engine Oil Fasten Safety Belt Fog Lamps Front High Beam Information Low Fuel Level Low Tire Pressure Warning Parking Lamps Service Engine Soon Traction and Stability Control Traction and Stability Control Off Washer Fluid Check 216 Washers See Cleaning the Exterior
338. loor on Recirc on Fan decrease Temperature Fan increase Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees Floor off Temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees Floor windshield panel on Temperature decrease MAX A C off Temperature high MAX A C on Temperature increase Max defrost off Temperature low Max defrost on Windshield floor on 370 MyFord Touch it equipped CLIMATE Max fan Windshield panel on Min fan Help If you say Temperature you can then say any of the commands in the following chart TEMPERATURE lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees lt 60 85 gt degrees High Low Help NAVIGATION iF EQUIPPED Note The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system If you need a replacement SD card see an authorized dealer Note The SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card just push the card in and release it Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it this could cause damage Your navigation system is comprised of two main features destination mode and map mode To set adestination press the green corner of your touchscreen then the Dest button when it appears See Setting a destination later in this chapter To view the navigation map and your vehicle s current location touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen or press Dest then Map See
339. lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if itis less than the maximum inf
340. low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water When a battery replacement is required the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery Some engine computer settings like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy optimize the driveability and performance of the engine Some other computer settings like the clock and radio station 217 presets are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery When atechnician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery these settings are erased Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Turn off all accessories Step on the brake pedal and start the vehicle Run the engi
341. ly Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications page 261 Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level Maintenance Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50 A coolant concentration of 60 will provide improved freeze point protection Engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage If you drive in extremely hot climates It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40 A coolant concentration of 40 will provide improved overheat protection Engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of
342. m and leave the nozzle fully inserted to open both doors until you are done pumping Hold handle higher during insertion for easier access 131 E154765 4 After youare done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about 5 to 10 seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the instrument cluster At the next opportunity do the following 1 Safely pull off the road 2 Put the vehicle in P Park and turn the ignition off 3 Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening 4 Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to allow the inlet to close properly This will dislodge any debris preventing the inlet from sealing Fuel and Refueling If this action corrects the problem the message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after 4 or more ho
343. mation to the restraints control module which deploys activates the front safety belt pretensioners driver airbag passenger airbag seat mounted side airbags and the Safety Canopy Based on the type of accident frontal impact side impact or rollover the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following Oe The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on The readiness light will either flash or stay lit Aseries of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem the light or both are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a crash Supplementary Restraints System The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to activate when your vehicle sustains frontal or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause t
344. mber in your account on the website Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth volume level has been turned up Try deleting your phone and performing a clean pairing heard a commercial when tried to use Traffic Direc tions and Information You did not activate this phone for this service Your phone has ID blocker active 317 This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recog nizes you by your phone number SYNCTM Vehicle Health Report and Services Traffic Directions and Information issues Possible cause s Possible solution s Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SYNCMyRide account Voice command issues SYNC does not understand what am saying Possible cause s You may be using the wrong voice commands You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time Possible solution s Review the phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections Be aware that SYNC s microphoneis either in your rear view mirror or in the headliner just above the windshield SYNC does not understand the name of a song or artist You may be using the wrong voice commands You may be saying the name differently than the way you Saved it
345. mended Oso i Oso i 414 Index 4 Audible Warnings and Indicators 87 Automatic Transmission Warning 4WD See Four Wheel Drive re 140 Engine On Warning Chime Headlamps On Warning Chime 87 A Key in Ignition Warning Chime 87 Keyless Warning Alert 08 87 A C Parking Brake On Warning Chime 87 See Climate Control 101 Audio Control 66 About This Manual Protecting the Environment ABS See Brakes ananas 145 General Information ABS driving hints Audio unit Vehicles With See Hints on Driving With Anti Lock AM FM CD SYNC Satellite RAGGA 272 Audio unit Vehicles With Exterior style 380 AM FM CD SYN Creer 270 Interior style 380 Audio unit Vehi Lifestyle AM FM CD Peace OF MIND 380 Audio unit Vehi Accessories AM FM CD See Replacement Parts Audio unit Vehi Recommendation AMZ FMZC Dia scis asic sceieacinascseacifessnasectacessnaneda Active Park Assist Menu Structure Automatic Steering into Parking Autolamps S PAGO it 2i s2cisecesss seins dheslevacadivoscaleste tentes 153 Automatic Climate Control Deactivating the Park Assist Feature 154 Temperature Control ss 03 Troubleshooting the System 155 Automatic Transmission 136 Using Active Park Assist 152 Brake Shift Interlock 137 Adjusting the Headlamps 220 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
346. mitter This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside the vehicle The transmitter has an extended operating range Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started See Automatic Climate Control page 102 Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems The remote start system will not work if the ignition is on the alarm system is triggered you disable the feature the hood is open the transmission is not in P the vehicle battery voltage is too low the service engine soon indicator was on the last time your vehicle was driven Remote Starting the Vehicle Note You must press each button within three seconds of each other Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do not follow this sequence E138626 The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure To remote start your vehicle 1 Press the lock button to lock all the doors 2 Press the remote start button twice The exterior lamps will flash twice The horn will sound if the system fails to start unless quiet start is on Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise You can switch it on or off in the information display See General Information page 88 Note f you remote start your vehic
347. mmendations see your dealership Example 2 The OIL CHANGE service advisor or technician REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30000 miles 48000 kilometers for example the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles 40000 kilometers Perform the engine air filter replacement Towing a trailer or using acar top carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched uled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently service as required Inspect and lubricate U joints See axle maintenance items under Exceptions Every 30000 miles 48000 km Change automatic transmission fluid Extensive idling or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched uled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently service as required Replace cabin air filter Replace engine air filter 406 Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery Every 30000 miles 48000 km Change automatic transmission fluid Every 60000 miles 96000 Replace spark plugs km
348. mmended O Signature ee ___ _ QD E Muti point inspection recommend C Multi point inspection recommended sara O sara O E Mutt point inspection recommended CT Multi point inspection Q wu poininspection recommended Oso i Oso i 410 Scheduled Maintenance O Repair Order Engine hours optional Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature O Repair Order O Multi point inspection recommended O Signature 41 Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order O Engine hours optional Multi point inspection recommended O Signature ee ___ _ QD E Muti point inspection recommend C Multi point inspection recommended sara O sara O E Mutt point inspection recommended CT Multi point inspection Q wu poininspection recommended Oso i Oso i 412 Scheduled Maintenance O Repair Order Engine hours optional Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature O Repair Order O Multi point inspection recommended O Signature 413 Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order O Engine hours optional Multi point inspection recommended O Signature ee ___ _ QD E Muti point inspection recommend C Multi point inspection recommended sara O sara O E Mutt point inspection recommended CT Multi point inspection Q wu poininspection recom
349. mps disabled Press the switch again to turn interior lamps back on The indicator lamp will illuminate blue bd B All lamps on and off switch C Individual lamp on and off a switch Rear Interior Lamp it Equipped E142455 A You can switch individual map lamps on independently by pressing switch Lighting AMBIENT LIGHTING iF EqQUIPPED The ambient lighting system illuminates the interior with a choice of several colors The ambient lighting control is located in the overhead console C A MK E142456 A Color palette B Control knob Cc Search mode Rotate B past the first detent to switch on and adjust to the desired brightness Press A to cycle through the color choices Press C to switch on all interior lamps and the ambient lighting Press C again to switch off the interior lamps and return the ambient lighting to the previously selected color The ambient lighting will switch on when the following conditions have been met you switch the ignition on you switch the headlamps on The ambient lighting will remain on until you switch the ignition off and one of the following conditions have been met you lock your vehicle the accessory delay timer expires 77 Windows and Mirrors POWER WINDOWS WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves When closing the power windo
350. ms Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in arear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position See Front Passenger Sensing System page 37 Airbags can kill or injure a child ina child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in arear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in arear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Child Safety WARNINGS Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height
351. music from your portable music player over your vehicle s speakers Plug in your 1 8 inch 3 5 millimeter RCA adapter into the two left A V input jacks red and white Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select A V In To use the auxiliary input jack feature make sure that your portable music player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully charged You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other 1 Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left A V input jacks white or red inside the center console MyFord Touch it equipped Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select either a tuned FM station or a CD if there is a CD already loaded into the system Adjust the volume as desired Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 2 the maximum Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select the A V In tab You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the controls In order to pl
352. n This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge I accessory Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running Note Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge Il on All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate Ill start cranks the engine KEYLESS STARTING iF EQUIPPED Note The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones Note A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition Modes E142555 The keyless starting system has three modes Off Turns the ignition off Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving On All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once Start Starts the engine Press the brake pedal and then press and hold the button until the engine starts STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine the idle speed increases this helps to warm up the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow dow
353. n gt Help gt Voice Command List If you use the steering wheel control press the voice icon After the tone speak your command clearly MyFord Touch i equipped Available voice commands Audio list of commands Bluetooth audio list of commands Browse list of commands CD list of commands Climate control list of commands List of commands Navigation list of commands Phone list of commands Radio list of commands SD card list of commands Sirius satellite list of commands n Travel link list of commands USB list of commands Voice instructions list of commands Voice settings list of commands Help This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot This command is only available when you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio subscription Voice Settings Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction help and feedback The system defaults to standard interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level of guidance and feedback 326 Interaction Mode Novice mode provides detailed interaction and guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Prompts The system uses these short
354. n Ford approved remote start system the vehicle may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges If you restart the engine by inserting a key into the ignition cylinder and recycling the ignition completely then you may retain some MyKey functions This action forces your vehicle to read the traditional key instead of the remote start fob and then uses the key s associated privileges Note The MyKey system status menu display may include the remote start system as an additional key in the total count of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED See Checking MyKey System Status page 50 MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Asan added precaution owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to program the remote start system as a MyKey if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob That way when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start system the MyKey restrictions will be remain active With a non Ford approved aftermarket remote start system it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally If this happens then the remote start fob is the admin key If you want to have only one real key as a MyKey or do not want to have any MyKeys then you need to use your remote start to clear all MyKeys In that case follow these steps Enter the vehicle and close all doors Remote start the vehicle using your non Ford approved remote start fob
355. n Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be DESIGNATION affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar the door latch post or the edge of the door near the door latch next to the driver s seating position MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR _ XXXX KG XXXX REAR GAWR XXXX KG XH LB WITH XXXX KG XXXX LB WITH XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXXX RIMS XXXXXXX RIMS AT XXXX kPa XXX PSICOLD AT XXXX kPa XXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE ae ne OANA J XXXXX XXXXX XXXX ATR ia TR rhe rey T XXXX wx XX XXX X X XX XXXX 200000000000 D O XXXX XXXXXXX XX The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description E167814 Description Code Six speed automatic transmission 6F35 6 264 Capacities and Specifications TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Brake Fluid Item Capacity Ford part name or Ford part number equivalent Ford specification Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX Motorcraft High PM 20 WSS on reservoir Performance DOT 4 M6C65 A2 and ISO LV Motor Vehicle 4925 Class
356. n active subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio For more commands in SD card or USB mode see the SD Card and USB Port section of this chapter Play song lt name gt Play lt name gt Play lt name song or album gt by lt artist name gt MyFord Touch i equipped Sample commands Sirius lt 0 223 gt Sports games This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio The commands that have around the word means that the word is optional For example if you say Play Metallica this is the same as the voice command Play artist lt name gt AM FM Radio Touch the AM or FM tab to listen D to the radio To change between AM and FM presets just touch the AM or FM tab Memory Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished HD Radio Touch this button to turn HD Radio on The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on HD Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally where available providing free crystal clear sound See HD Radio information later in this chapter Scan Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on Options Sound Settings Touch this button to adju
357. n automatically have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer Before starting the engine check the following Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off Make sure the parking brake is on Move the transmission selector lever to position P Turn the ignition key to position II If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition see the following instructions Vehicles with an Ignition Key Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Turn the key to position IH to start the engine Release the key when the engine starts Note The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts Note f you cannot start the engine on the first try wait for a short period and try again Vehicles with Keyless Start Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Press the button The system does not function if The key frequencies are jammed The key battery has no charge If you are unable to start the engine do the following Starting and Stopping the Engine 3 button remote E145988 5 button remote E142874 1 Hold the key next to the symbol on the steering column 2 With the key in this position you can use the start button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to res
358. n playing devices if your metadata tags are not populated the tracks are not available in voice recognition play menu or similar music However if you place these tracks onto your playing device in Mass Storage Device Mode they are available in voice recognition play menu browsing and similar music The system places Unknown items into any unpopulated metadata tag System Settings Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu 2 Scroll to System Settings Press OK Scroll to Bluetooth Devices Press OK to add connect and delete a device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off When you select Add Bluetooth Device You can Pair more devices to the system 1 Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC appears in the display 2 Follow the directions in your phone s manual to put your phone into discovery mode A six digit PIN appears in the display 312 SYNCTM When you select You can 3 When prompted on your phone s six digit display enter the PIN Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth enabled device 1 Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired devices 2 Scroll until you find the desired device and then press OK to connect the device Set Bluetooth Delete Device Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off 1 Press OK and scroll to toggle betwe
359. n serious personal injury or death Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury Locks Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate Note Do not hang anything for example a bike rack from the glass or liftgate This could damage the liftgate and its components Note Do not leave the liftgate open while driving This could damage the liftgate and its components Opening the Liftgate Manually E138632 Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate and then pull on the outside handle With the Remote Control Press the button twice within three seconds 59 Closing the Liftgate E155976 A handle is located inside the liftgate to help with closing POWER LIFTGATE iF EQUIPPED WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be s
360. n the disc with an approved CD cleaner only Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge Do not cleanina circular motion 267 Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from TOO to a maximum of T255 The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present Audio System MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from FOO folder TOO track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create While various files may be present files with extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension are played other files are ignored by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc fo
361. nal Text message inbox Words in are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command Making Calls Press the voice icon and when prompted say 1 Say Call lt name gt or Dial then the desired number 2 When the system confirms the number say Dial again to initiate the call To erase the last spoken digit say Delete or press the left arrow button To erase all Receiving Calls When receiving a call you can Answer the call by pressing the phone button Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button Ignore the call by doing nothing Phone Options during an Active Call During an active call you have more menu features that become available such as putting a call on hold or joining calls Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options 1 Press MENU during an active call 2 After selecting Active Call Menu press spoken digits say Clear or press and hold OK the left arrow button 3 Scroll to cycle through the following To end the call press and hold the phone options button When you select You can Mute Call Mute the call Privacy Switch a call from an active hands free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation Press OK when Privacy on off appears The display indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call Call Hold Put an active call on hold Press OK when Hold
362. nates on Oar engine start up and stays on when you turn the traction control system off When you turn the traction control system off or on a message appears in the information display showing system status Stability Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvancetTrac system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to
363. nd rear seat floor vents Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection When on defrost provides outside air to reduce window fogging and distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents MAX Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield air vents and automatically switches the air conditioning on The fan is set to the highest speed and the temperature to HI When the air distribution is set in this position you are unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control Driver settings Touch or adjust the temperature Climate Control Voice Commands Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands 369 MyFord Touch if Equipped Climate Control Commands Climate automatic Climate off Climate on Climate temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees Climate temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees Help There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first When the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands CLIMATE A C off Off A C on On Automatic Panel floor on Defrost off Panel on Defrost on Panel off Dual off Recirc off F
364. nd if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition Electronically lock the vehicle to arm the alarm The message indicator flashes when theft protection is active Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad Switch the ignition on or start the vehicle Use a key in the driver s door to unlock the vehicle then switch the ignition on within 12 seconds Note Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators but will not disarm the system Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position See Sitting in the Correct Position page 109 E95179 3 Lock the steering column AUDIO CONTROL iF EQUIPPED Select the required source on the audio unit You can operate the following functions with the control E95178 1 Unlock the steering column 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position 66 Steering Wheel Type eE NA A C E129462 A Volume up Seek up
365. nd only an assist Driving Aids E142440 In this first example the left sensor is only partially obstructed zone coverage is nearly maximized E142441 Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles Here the left sensor is mostly obstructed zone coverage on that side is severely limited 161 Driving Aids System Lights and Messages E142442 The BLIS and Cross Traffic Alert systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from Note The alert indicator dims when nighttime darkness is detected Cross Traffic Alert also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own series of tones See Parking Aid page 150 System Sensors WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Note t is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present this is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition either self
366. ndations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size height weight or age Recommended restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less Use a child safety seat toddlers generally age four or younger sometimes called an Small children infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat gener ally children who are less than 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall are greater than age four and less than age 12 and between 40 lb 18 kg and 80 lb 36 kg and upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Use a belt positioning booster seat Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall or greater than 80 lb 36 kg or 100 lb 45 kg if recom mended by child restraint manufacturer Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seat back upright You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlersin CHILD SEAT POSITIONING the United States and Canada WARNINGS Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilogra
367. nded engine oil Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance 183 Avoid these actions they reduce your fuel economy Sudden accelerations or hard accelerations Rev the engine before turning it off Idle for periods longer than one minute Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings Use the air conditioner or front defroster Use the speed control in hilly terrain Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer Carry unnecessary weight approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 lb 180 kilogram of weight carried Drive with the wheels out of alignment Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed 13q Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy To maximize the fuel economy drive with the tonneau cover installed if equipped Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 kilometers of driving Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain Driving Hints Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal Four wheel drive operation if equipped is less fuel ef
368. nditions Vehicle With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps The Daytime Running Lamp system switches the fog lamps on in day light conditions Not available in all markets FRONT FOG LAMPS K Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Off and the high beams are not on E142453 DIRECTION INDICATORS Ly y Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators Note Jap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change INTERIOR LAMPS The lamps will switch on when one of the following conditions have been met Lighting You open any door You press a remote control button You press switch B on the front interior lamp Front Interior Lamp Without moonroof A Door function switch Press this switch to disable the interior lamps The door function indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with lamps disabled Press the switch again to turn interior lamps back on The indicator lamp will illuminate blue bid B All lamps on and off switch C Passenger individual lamp D on and off switch A D E161163 D Driver individual lamp on and NU off switch With moonroof E142454 A Door function switch Press this switch to disable the interior lamps The door function indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with la
369. nditions exist Wheels and Tires Tire Wear E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch 2 mm When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended Age WARNING Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if i
370. ne speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage Do not park idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system creating the risk of fire Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes If you disconnect the battery your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles 8 kilometers after you reconnect it This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise When you start the engine avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine 123 IGNITION SWITCH E72128 O off The ignition is off Note When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle do not leave your key in the ignitio
371. ne until it reaches normal operating temperature While the engine is warming up complete the following Reset the clock See Audio System page 267 Reset the power windows bounce back feature See Windows and Mirrors page 78 Reset the radio station presets See Audio System page 267 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute If the engine turns off step on the accelerator to start the engine While the engine is running step on the brake pedal and shift the transmission to N Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal Drive the vehicle at least 10 miles 16 kilometers to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy Note f you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy 2 3 Maintenance Note Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner Follow your local authorized standards for disposal Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries Note t is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES E142463 Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for ro
372. ng Displays when the luggage compartmentis not completely closed Hood open Red Displays when the hood is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving Displays when the hood is not completely closed 93 Information Displays Engine Message Message Action Indicator Engine fault Service now Amber Engine service is required Contact your authorized dealer High engine temperature Red Displays when the engine temperature is too Stop safely high Stop the vehicle in a safe place and allow to engine to cool If the problem persists contact your authorized dealer See Engine Coolant Check page 212 Power reduced to lower Displays when the engine has reduced power temperature in order to help reduce high coolant temper ature Hill Start Assist Message Message Action Indicator Hill start assist not avail Amber Displays when hill start assist is not available able Contact your authorized dealer See Hill Start Assist page 138 Keyless Vehicle Message Message Action Indicator Ford KeyFree Key inside Amber Displays to remind you that the key is in the vehicle trunk See Keyless Starting page 123 Ford KeyFree No key Displayed if the key is not detected by the detected system See Keyless Starting page 123 Switch ign off Press Red Displayed as a reminder to turn off the vehicle ENGINE Start Stop button See Keyless Starting page 123 94
373. ng light Tire s under inflated 1 Make sure tires are at the proper pres sure See Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light turns off Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Flashing warning Spare tire in use light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires 2
374. ngle chime Recalling a Pre Set Position Press and release the memory button associated with your desired driving position The seat and mirrors will move to the position stored for that pre set Note Pressing any driver seat control any of the memory buttons or any mirror control switch will stop seat movement during a recall You cannot use the seat memory recall while the vehicle is moving REAR SEATS E155554 Folding the Seatback With the seat empty pull the lever up to fold the seatback forward You may need to fold the outboard head restraints and lower the center head restraint first Unfolding the Seatback Pull the seatback upward to unfold the seatback Recline Adjustment if Equipped With the seat occupied pull the lever up to recline the seatback Seats HEATED SEATS ir EQUIPPED WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the heated seat The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the heated seat to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated
375. nks to third party sites those links are provided to you only as a convenience and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Obligation to Drive Responsibly You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip CD ROM disk s or via web download or other means and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one 1 copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE asa replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE and use it in accordance with this EULA including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE 385 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY or their affiliates or suppliers The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold You may n
376. normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire E142544 LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below A LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for service on light trucks B Load Range and Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits Wheels and Tires C Maximum Load Dual lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle D Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is use
377. ntelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system The key must be in your vehicle to activate the push button start system E142431 The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that you can use to unlock the driver door Slide the release on the back of the transmitter to release the key blade then pull the blade out 1031X E138618 Note Your vehicle s back up keys came with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut information Keep the tag in a Safe place for future reference Replacing the Battery Note Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board Note Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the vehicle The transmitter should operate normally The remote control uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent Keys and Remote Controls Integrated Keyhead Transmitter E138619 1 Twista thin coin in the slot of the transmitter near the key ring to remove the battery cover 2 Remove the old battery E138620 3 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter Intellig
378. ny navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully Distraction Hazard Any navigation features may require manual non verbal setup Attempting to perform such set up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations Let Your Judgment Prevail Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices Route Safety Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Appendices Potential Map Inaccuracy Maps used by this system may be inaccu
379. o give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SY NCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands wh MyFord Touch it equipped 1 Press the voice button When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 3 Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the green tab on your touchscreen 1 Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your phone Once connected follow the voice prompts to request your desired Service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation press the Information button Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When conne
380. o increase fuel consumption The system is accessed using the information display control See General Information page 88 Typel E142444 A Anticipation B Efficient speed Anticipation Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance to other vehicles to avoid the need for heavy braking or acceleration to improve fuel economy Efficient speed Reduce your cruising speed on open roads to improve economy Higher speeds use more fuel Type 2 and 3 The relevant information is shown in the display Resetting Eco Mode Reset the average fuel consumption by using the information display control Note New values may take a short time to calculate STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNINGS The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation When a system error is detected a steering message will appear in the information display The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system When an electronic error is detected a message will be displayed in the information display If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn Driving Aids WARNINGS off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the system by restarting the engine and watch the information display for a steering message If a steering message returns or return
381. o its original position Heated Exterior Mirrors if Equipped See Heated Windows and Mirrors page 107 Windows and Mirrors Memory Mirrors if Equipped You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function See Memory Function page 113 Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors t Equipped WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors They are designed to increase your visibility along the side of your vehicle Check the main mirror first before a lane change then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you intend to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes E138665 The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches A The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches B The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror C Blind Spot Monitor if equipped See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 INTERIOR MI
382. o to the website to review your phone s compatibility This is a phone dependent feature 314 SYNCTM Phone issues Possible cause s Possible solution s This may be a possible phone malfunction Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again Try pushing your phone book contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website The system says Phonebook Downloaded but the phonebook in SYNC is empty or missing contacts This may be a limitation on your phone s capability Try pushing your phone book contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card try moving them to the device memory Remove any pictures or special ring tones associ ated with the missing contact lam having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC This is a phone dependent feature This may be a possible phone malfunction 315 Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s battery then trying again Try deleting your device from SYNC deleting SYNC from your device and trying again Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone Update your devi
383. of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features provided are only an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver place you in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not subscribe or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news spor
384. of will stop automatically while closing It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way 82 Instrument Cluster GAUGES E145825 A Information display B Speedometer C Engine coolant temperature gauge D Fuel gauge E Tachometer Information Display Compass If Equipped Displays the vehicle s heading direction To calibrate and set the compass zone use the information display menu See Information Displays page 88 Use the diagram to determine your magnetic zone 83 Instrument Cluster E142800 Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display it registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled Outside Air Temperature Shows the outside air temperature Trip Computer See Trip Computer page 90 Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information page 88 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot At normal operating temperature the needle will remain in the center section Note Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved If the needle enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the engine switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down See Engine Coolant Check page 212 Fuel Gauge Switch the ignition on The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much
385. ol down the interior and help reduce odors from reaching the interior Recirculated air also engages automatically when MAX A C or MAX defrost is selected and may be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost It may also turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A C and MAX defrost to reduce fog potential MAX A C Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air Touch again for normal A C operation MAX A C distributes air through instrument panel vents and may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle MAX A C is more economical and efficient than normal A C mode A C Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C defrost and footwell defrost AUTO Touch to engage automatic operation then set the temperature using the temperature control The system automatically controls fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and the use of fresh or recirculated air Manual airflow distribution controls Footwell and Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents and provides outside air to reduce window fogging Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents Panel and Floor Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents Floor Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents a
386. on Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Blind Spot Monitor 1 Equipped It will illuminate when you switch this feature off or in conjunction with a message See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 See Information Messages page 91 Brake System It will illuminate when you engage the parking brake with O the ignition on If it illuminates when you are driving check that the parking brake is not engaged If the parking brake is not engaged this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer 85 WARNING Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop your vehicle Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury Cruise Control if Equipped It will illuminate when you switch this feature on See Using Cruise Control page 159 Direction Indicator Illuminates when the left or right em turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb See Changing a Bulb page 222 Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are drivin
387. on indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance 1 M Testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced See On Board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking Fuel and Refueling the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready
388. on of your vehicle you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons See Erasing the function button codes later in this section Note You can program a maximum of three devices To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed you must first erase the current settings See Erasing the function button codes later in this section A 000 E142657 16 The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the driver s sun visor The system includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home As well as being programmed for garage doors the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting Additional system information can be found online at www homelink com or by calling the toll free help line on 1 800 355 3515 In vehicle programming This process is to program your hand held transmitter and your in vehicle HomeLink button Note Put a new battery in the hand held transmitter This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 000 1 With your vehicle parked outside of the garage turn your ignition to the on position but do not start your vehicle Hold your hand held garage door transmitte
389. on off appears To answer another call at this time press the phone button Enter Tones Enter tones such as numbers for passwords Scroll until the desired number appears in the display then press OK a tone sounds as confirmation Repeat as necessary Join Calls Join two separate calls SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty call or conference call 1 Press the phone button 293 SYNCTM When you select You can 2 Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call Once actively in the second call press MENU 3 Scroll to Join Calls and press OK Press OK again when Join Calls appears Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts Press OK to select and then scroll through your phone book contacts 2 Press OK again when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button Call History Access your call history log 1 Press OK to select then scroll through your call history options incoming outgoing or missed 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button to call the selection Return Exit the current menu 1 Press the phone button to enter the Accessing Features through the phone menu Phone Menu 2 Scroll to cycle through SYNC s phone menu allows you to redial a number access your call history and phonebook and sends text messages as well
390. onfirm menu selections INFO Press this button to access any available radio or CD information TUNE and TUNE Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band Number block In radio mode store your favorite radio stations To store a radio station tune to the station then press and hold a preset button until sound returns In CD mode select a track In phone mode enter a phone number Clock Push to access clock settings You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings Function buttons Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in such as Radio mode or CD mode 273 Audio System Sound Press this button to access settings for Treble Middle Bass Fade and Balance Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings When you make your selection press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings Press OK to set or press MENU to exit Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently Seek Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio station or disc track Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous or next strong radio station memory preset or through the current disc track ON OFF Press this button to switch the system off and on Turn to adjust the volume MENU Press this button to access different audio system features See Menu Structure lat
391. only without a voice reminder at phone connection To make sure that 911 Assist works properly SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident 302 You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U S Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off the triggers for 911 Assist If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services Before making the call SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call If you fail to cancel the call SYNC attempts to dial 911 SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If you do not cancel
392. ops Do not use BLIS or Cross Traffic Alert in these conditions System Limitations The BLIS and Cross Traffic Alert systems do have their limitations situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone The following are other situations that may limit the Cross Traffic Alert system Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h 163 Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h Backing out of an angled parking spot False Alerts Note f the vehicle has a factory equipped tow bar and it is towing a trailer the sensors will detect the trailer and turn the BLIS and Cross Traffic Alert off to avoid false alerts For non factory equipped tow bars you may want to turn the BLIS off manually There may be certain instances when either the BLIS or Cross Traffic Alert systems illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone this is known as a false alert Some amount of false alerts are normal they are temporary and self correct System Errors If either system senses a problem with t
393. or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Replacing Headlamp Bulbs WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note f the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used Maintenance E142469 A Side marker B Low beam headlamp C High beam headlamp High beam headlamp 2 4 E142470 1 Remove the headlamp Remove service cap Disconnect the electrical connector Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out Low beam headlamp 2 3 4 223 E142471 1 Remove the headlamp Remove service cap Disconnect the electrical connector Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out PWN Install the new bulbs in reverse order from the steps above Be sure that the spring clip is not damaged or detached from the headlamp assembly during the replacement procedure Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs cir Equipped The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltag
394. or activate the system while driving your vehicle Note The driver and front passenger warning are deactivated and activated independently When deactivating or activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure Before following the procedure make sure that the parking brake is set the transmission selector lever is in position P the ignition is off the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 1 Turn the ignition on Do not start the engine Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off about one minute After Step 2 wait an additional five seconds before proceeding with Step 3 Once Step 3 is started the procedure must be completed within 60 seconds 32 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt four times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will turn on While the safety belt warning light is on buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt After Step 4 the safety belt warning light will flash for confirmation This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety bel
395. or next Volume down Seek down or previous Mode Mm O O W Press M to select the audio source E129463 A Volume up B Seek up or next C Volume down D Seek down or previous Seek Next or Previous Press the seek button to tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset play the next or the previous track Press and hold the seek button to tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band seek through a track 67 Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL iF EQUIPPED CRUISE CONTROL E142437 See Cruise Control page 159 E161798 Pull the control to select or deselect voice control See SYNC page 286 See INFORMATION DISPLAY MyFord Touch page 320 CONTROL MyFord Touch Controls if Equipped Your steering wheel controls may also have these additional features fay Press to go to the home screen e Press to go to the information 2 screen See MyFord Touch page 320 E130248 See Information Displays page 88 68 Steering Wheel Multimedia Controls if Equipped E145434 Use the arrows on the right side of the steering wheel to navigate through the menus Press OK to make a selection 69 Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers Note Vake sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wipe
396. orite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle Index Bluetooth Audio When this feature is on the system automatically indexes Devices media on your connected Bluetooth device Gracenote Database Info This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database Gracenote Mgmt With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files This overrides information from your device This feature defaults to off Cover Art Priority With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files This overrides any art from your device This feature defaults to Media Player Navigation Press the Settings icon gt Ths Settings gt Navigation then select from the following 331 MyFord Touch i equipped Navigation Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top Turn the Parking POI notification on and off Route Preferences Have the system display the shortest route fastest route or ecological route Have the system avoid freeways Have the system avoid tollroads Have the system avoid ferries or car trains Have the system use HOV high occupancy vehicle lanes Navigation Preferences Have the system use guidance prompts Have the system automatically fill in St
397. ormation such as travel horoscopes stock prices and more 911 Assist Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency Vehicle Health Report Provides a diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle This is an optional feature and available in the United States only 911 Assist WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash WARNINGS Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident Note Before setting this feature on make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information Note f any user turns 911 Assist on or off that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is tu
398. ormation such as star rating price category review check in and checkout times hotel service icons and website address Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation Map Preferences Breadcrumbs Display your vehicle s previously traveled route with white dots Turn this feature ON or OFF Turn List Format Have the system display your turn list Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top Parking POI Notification Set the automatic parking point of interest notification Turn this feature ON or OFF When parking point of interest notification is on the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination This may not be very useful in dense areas and may clutter the map when other points of interest display 374 Route Preferences Preferred Route Choose to have the system display the Shortest Fastest or most Ecological route first If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination Always Use Preferred Route Bypass route selection in destination programming The system only calculates one route based on preferred route setting Eco Time Penalty Select a low medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route The higher the setting the longer the time allotment is for the route Avoi
399. ormats and Metadata Information SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune plays from device players and most USB drives Supported audio formats include MP3 WMA WAV and AAC It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags Metadata tags which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files provide information about the file If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple When you connect the cable to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port Bluetooth Audio Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle s speakers from your connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To access press the lower left D corner on the touchscreen then select the BT Stereo tab MyFord Touch f Equipped Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands If you are listening to a Bluetooth us audio device press the voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say Next song Pause Play or Previous song If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice button and after the tone say Next song Pause Play or
400. ost engine 2 0LEcoBoostengine 2 5L engine Cubic inches 98 152 Required fuel Minimum 87octane Minimum 87 octane Minimum 87 octane Compression 10 0 1 9 71 ratio Spark plug gap 0 027 0 031 in 0 70 0 027 0 031in 0 049 0 053 in 0 80 mm 0 70 0 80 mm 1 25 1 35 mm Drivebelt Routing 1 6L engine E161372 2 0L and 2 5L engines E161383 Capacities and Specifications A Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine B Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine MOTORCRAFT PARTS Component 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0LEcoBoost engine 2 5L engine engine Air filter FA 1908 FA 1908 FA 1910 element Oil filter FL 910 S Battery BXT 96R 500 or BXT 96R 590 Spark plugs CYFS 13Y RC CYFS 12Y 2 AYFS 32Y R Cabin air filter FP70 Windshield WW 2750 driver side wiper blade WW 2705 WA passenger side Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used Only use the specified replacement oil filter The use of a non specified oil filter can result in engine damage For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 Note Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your ve
401. ot copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties This EULA grants you no rights to use such content All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service providers their affiliates and suppliers Use of any on line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U S and European Union export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting Appendices TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation third party so
402. oth retention posts to ensure mats do not shift out of position Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Driving Hints WARNINGS Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing loss of control of vehicle To install floor mats position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure 185 Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold In The U S Getting Roadside Assistance To full
403. ou connect it to the system The system automatically transfers the tag to your player if already connected and a pop up confirms the transfer When you access iTunes with your portable music player the tags appear to you as areminder The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs For a list of devices that support tagging see www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 2 MyFord Touch f Equipped When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as amemory preset Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset the sound mutes before the digital audio plays because the system has to reacquire the digital signal Note As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of th
404. ouch this button to view and adjust various media settings Sound Settings Touch this button to adjust settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Set Category for Seek Scan This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category Parental Lockout This allows you to lock and unlock channels change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels To use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234 Artist Title Team Alerts This feature allows you to select Artists Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts You can also set all alerts to on or off When an alert appears on the screen you can choose to MyFord Touch f Equipped Tune to the channel to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts If you are listening to a sporting event you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel Note S RIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation Electronic Serial Number ESN SIRIUS requires this number when communi
405. ound 635 kilogram cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you four of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 pounds 99 kilograms each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds 13 5 kilograms each The calculation would be 1400 5x 220 5x30 1400 1100 Load Carrying 150 150 pounds Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kilograms 5 x 99 kilograms 5x 13 5 kilograms 635 495 67 5 72 5 kilograms Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 pound 635 kilogram cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for twelve 100 pound 45 kilogram bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds 99 kilograms the calculation would be 1400 2x 220 12x100 1400 440 1200 240 pounds No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kilograms 2 x 99 kilograms 12 x 45 kilograms 635 198 540 103 kilograms You will need to redu
406. ow disabled and you can close the window manually The window will go past the point of resistance and you can close it fully See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if the window does not close after the third attempt Resetting the Bounce Back Feature WARNING The bounce back feature remains turned off until you reset the memory If you have disconnected the battery you must reset the bounce back memory separately for each window 1 Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed 2 Release the switch 3 Lift the switch again for one more second 4 Press and hold the switch until the window is fully open 5 Release the switch 6 Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed 7 Open the window and then try to close it automatically 8 Reset and repeat the procedure if the window does not close automatically Accessory Delay it Equipped You can use the window switches for several minutes after you have switched the ignition off or until either front door is opened EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving A on c A Left hand mirror B Off C Right hand mirror E70846 gt E70847 y Press the arrows to adjust the mirror Fold Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it t
407. ow the instructions specified by the equipment provider Four wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat towed all wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise you cannot recreational tow your vehicle Driving Hints BREAKING IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles 480 kilometers During this time your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early Do not labor the engine Do not tow during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers ECONOMICAL DRIVING Your fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these things in mind Accelerate and slow down in a smooth moderate fashion Drive at steady speeds without stopping Anticipate stops slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Close the windows for high speed driving Drive at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size Use the recomme
408. own from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on Vehicle Health Report if Equipped WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note This feature is only available in the United States 367 Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehi
409. parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood E142457 1 Pull the hood release handle 206 Maintenance E142458 2 Move the catch to the right E87786 3 Open the hood and support it with the prop rod Closing the Hood 1 Remove the prop rod from the catch and secure properly after use 2 Lower the hood and allow it to drop from under its own weight for the last 8 11 inches 20 30 centimeters Note Make sure that you have closed the hood properly 207 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 1 6L ECOBOOSTTM E157261 i oon moo D G Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Engine oil dipstick Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap 208 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 2 0L ECOBOOST E146022 Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Engine oil filler cap Windshield washer fluid reservoir TO n monou DA 209 Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 2 5L E146023 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly IOn M O NN D E 210 Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 1
410. peed wipe Switch the autowipers off A ts at A High sensitivity B On C Low sensitivity E168041 The wipers will function when moisture is detected on the windshield The rain sensor will continue to monitor the amount of moisture on the windshield and adjust the speed of the wipers automatically Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor With low sensitivity the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of moisture on the windshield With high sensitivity the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of moisture on the windshield Keep the outside of the windshield clean Sensor performance will be affected if the area around the interior mirror is dirty The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt mist or flies hit the windshield 71 WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat E168042 To operate the washers and spray the windshield pull the lever toward you When you release the lever the wipers will operate for a short time REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rear Window Wiper 45 eB E168043 A Intermittent wipe Low speed wipe B Off Wipers and Washers Press the top of the button at the end of the lever to change between intermittent and low speed wipe Press the bottom of the button to turn the wip
411. perating the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further Maintain pressure on the brake pedal You may also hear a noise from the system This is normal The anti lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you your vehicle is hydroplaning you take corners too fast the road surface is poor Brakes PARKING BRAKE WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and leave your vehicle with the transmission selector lever in position P Note Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up To apply the parking brake 1 Press the foot brake pedal firmly 2 Pull the parking brake lever up to its fullest extent Note f you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the steering wheel away from the curb Note f you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill move the transmission selector lever to P and turn the steering wheel toward the curb To release the parking brake 1 Press the brake pedal firmly 2 Pull the lever up slightly 3 Press the release button and push the lever down HILL START ASSIST WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake When you leave your vehicle always apply the parking brake and put the vehicle in P Park You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system During all times you are responsib
412. peratures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications See Capacities and Specifications page 261 State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol acommon windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system 216 CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries
413. point of interest POI information is limited to approximately 912 cities 881 in the United States 20 in Canada and 11 in Mexico cityseekr cityseekr when available is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants hotels and attractions E142634 When you have selected a point of interest the location and information appear such as address and phone number If cityseekr lists the point of interest more information is available such as a brief description check in and checkout times or restaurant hours Press More Information for a longer review a list of services and facilities the average room or meal price as well as the website This screen displays the point of interest icon such as 373 Hotel Coffeehouse Food amp Drink Nightlife Attraction This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple categories within the system When you are viewing more information for hotels cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons such as Restaurant Business center Handicap facilities Laundry Refrigerator 24 hour room service Fitness center Internet access Pool Wi fi MyFord Touch f Equipped For restaurants cityseekr can provide information such as star rating average cost review handicap access hours of operation and website address For hotels cityseekr can provide inf
414. possibilities for clarification 289 SYNCTM When you say The system Media candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the media candidate list The system may occasion ally ask you questions Media candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for media candidates Phone candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the phone candidate list The system may occasion ally ask you questions Phone candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for phone candidates Helpful Hints Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken before this does not register with the system Speak naturally without long pauses between words At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Re
415. pushing or pulling on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat 39 The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above ys Make sure the front passenger AN sensing system is operating properly See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 42 If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver or adult passengers should check for objects that lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If there are lodged objects or cargo is interfering with the seat take the following steps to remove the obstruction Pull the vehicle over Turn the vehicle off Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat Remove the obstruction s if found Restart the vehicle Supplementary Restraints System Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lampis no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not bea problem due to the front passenger sensing system Do not attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an a
416. questions to confirm your voice request If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested The system may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings Phone and Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command To access these settings using the touchscreen Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control Select from Interaction Mode Confirmation Prompts Media Candidate Lists Phone Candidate Lists Voice Control Volume To access these settings using voice commands 1 2 Press the voice icon Wait for the prompt Please say a command Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening 2 Say any of the following commands Voice settings using voice commands Confirmation prompts off Confirmation prompts on Interaction mode advanced MyFord Touch it equipped Voice settings using voice commands Interaction mode novice Media candidate lists off Media candidate lists on Phone candidate lists off Phone candidate lists on Help SETTINGS E161968 Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help nmo ouw gt 327 Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options Your voice system has a dual mode feat
417. r F10 5A Driver seat memory module logic feed F11 5A Rear ignition coil feed F12 Not used F13 Not used F14 Not used F15 Not used F16 Not used F17 Not used F18 Not used F19 Not used F20 Not used F21 Not used F22 Not used F23 25A Audio amplifier F24 30A DC AC power converter F25 25A Power liftgate F26 40A Accessories Trailer tow module 30 feed 1 F27 Not used F28 Not used F29 5A Blind spot detection system Rear view camera with park assist F30 5A Parking aid module F31 Not used F32 5A DC AC power converter F33 Not used 204 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amprating Protected components F34 20A Driver seat heater F35 20A Passenger seat heater F36 Not used F37 Not used F38 Not used F39 Not used F40 Not used F41 Not used F42 Not used F43 Not used F44 Not used F45 Not used F46 Not used RI Power relay Rear 15 relay R2 Not used R3 Not used R4 E Not used R5 Not used R6 Not used 205 Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value Thereis a large network of Ford authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise We believe that their specially trained technicians are bes
418. r asnap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it E142875 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out Note The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 21 E142533 8 E142534 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight for example by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle Sometimes a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped a Child Safety 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and
419. r blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that does not resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield E168040 A Single wipe Intermittent wipe Normal wipe High speed wipe On D Intermittent Wipe A te nit A Short wipe interval B Intermittent wipe C Long wipe interval E168041 Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval Speed dependent wipers if equipped When your vehicle speed increases the interval between wipes will decrease AUTOWIPERS 1F EQUIPPED Note Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers Note Vake sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that does not resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note f you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers the low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously Note Wet road conditions can cause unexpected wiping or smearing Wipers and Washers To reduce smearing we recommend the following Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers Switch to normal or high s
420. r communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers The additional software and services of third party origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved The MS SOFTWARE FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers Appendices Description of Other Rights and Limitations SOFTWARE Transfer You may permanently transfer your rights under Speech Recognition f the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component s you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statis
421. r 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters away from the HomeLink button you want to program E142658 Universal Garage Door Opener if Equipped 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indicates successful training 4 Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for five seconds then release You may need to do this twice to activate the door If your garage door does not operate watch the HomeLink indicator light If the indicator light stays on the programming is complete See Programming your garage door motor later in this section If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turnsto a constant light the HomeLink button is not programmed yet Do the following Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button every 2 seconds The Home Link indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function button recognizes and accepts the hand held transmitter s radio frequency signal After programming the HomeLink button begin programming your garage door opener motor Note You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your ga
422. r a variety of tasks on your work computer home computer and your in vehicle system 268 In track mode the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files play regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system only plays the mp3 files in the current folder AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH AM FM CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Audio System E142600 we Eject Press this button to eject a CD Cursor arrows Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices CD slot Insert a CD OK Press this button to confirm menu selections Clock Press to set the time Use the cursor arrow to set the hours and minutes Press OK to confirm the time You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings INFO or TUNE If your system has an INFO button press it to access any available radio or CD information If your vehicle has a TU
423. r wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to your vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Note Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Stripes or Graphics if equipped Do not use a commercial or high pressure wand on the surface or edge of stripes and graphics This can cause damage to the film and cause the edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface Exterior Chrome Note Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers Vehicle Care Wash your vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Do not apply
424. radio or change radio frequencies Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions O CD Press this button to listen to a CD Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on screen options of Repeat or Shuffle AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH AM FM CD SYNC WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Note You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition Press the ON OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off The system automatically turns off after one hour Audio System E162867 OM Eject Press this button to eject a CD Cursor arrows Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices OK Press this button to confirm menu selections INFO Press this button to access any available radio or CD information TUNE and TUNE Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band Number block In radio mode sto
425. rage door opener E142659 To program additional buttons repeat Steps 1 4 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Programming your garage door opener motor 1 Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps 2 Return to your vehicle A 000 3 Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds then release Repeat this step Depending on your brand of garage door opener you may need to repeat this sequence a third time E142658 Erasing the Function Button Codes Note You cannot erase individual buttons Universal Garage Door Opener if Equipped E142660 1 Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly When the indicator lights flash release the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased Reprogramming a Single Button To program a device to a previously trained button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired button Do NOT release the button The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the button follow Step 1in the Programming section 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener Note The Gen
426. ransmission Towing a four wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment This prevents damage to the transmission four wheel drive system and vehicle TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing If your vehicle becomes inoperable without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat towed all wheels on the ground regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration under the following conditions Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction Place the transmission in position N If you cannot move the transmission into N you may need to override it See Transmission page 136 Maximum speed is 35 mph 56 km h Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 kilometers Recreational Towing Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle See Climate Control page 101 Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission Front wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat towed all wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur You must place the front wheels ona two wheel tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly foll
427. rate The system should not be used if a foreign object i e bike rack or trailer is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors an overhanging object i e surfboard is attached to the roof the front bumper or side sensors are damaged i e in a collision or obstructed by a foreign object i e front bumper cover a mini spare tire is in use Using Active Park Assist AUTO IPI ON E142733 Parking Aids Press the button The touch screen displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it s searching for a parking space Use the turn signal to indicate which side of the vehicle you want the system to search on Note f the turn signal is not on the system automatically searches on the vehicle s passenger side When a suitable space is found the touch screen displays a message and a chime sounds Slow down and stop at approximately position A then follow the instructions on the touch screen Note You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver Note Vehicles with overhanging loads e g a bus ora truck street furniture and other items may not be detected by active park assist You must make sure the selected space is suitable for parking Note The vehicle should be driven as parallel to other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space Note Th
428. rate because of changes in roads traffic controls or driving conditions Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes Emergency Services Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations Not all emergency services such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features TeleNav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions do not break the seal of the package launch or otherwise use the TeleNav Software TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time with or without notice to you You agree to visit http Avww telenav com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy 1 Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software a observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely b us
429. ration the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle E142664 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 188 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine or connect the negative cable toa ground connection point if available WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Jump Starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 roms as shown in your tachometer Start the engine of the disabled vehicle Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Wn Removing the Jumper Cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Roadside Emergencies E142665 z7 1 Remove the jumper cab ground metal surface or point if available 2 Remove the jumper cab e from the connecting e onthe negative t
430. re Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote entry system The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if you start your vehicle you press the remote control lock button or after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if you turn them on with the lamp control or any door is open Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and 25 seconds elapse or you lock your vehicle from the outside Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome lamps on and switch the ignition off the battery saver shuts them off after some time Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys If Equipped If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle it will shut off 15 minutes after you Close all of the doors MANUAL LIFTGATE WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Failure to follow this warning could result i
431. re information on the service engine soon indicator See Warning Lamps and Indicators page 84 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury Fuel and Refueling WARNINGS Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system andits seal and cause injury to you or others Note Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle The funnel is located in the rear of the vehicle inside the load compartment underneath the load floor carpet 1 Locate the portable funnel that comes with your vehicle E157279 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel system 130 E157280 3 Fillthe vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container When done clean the funnel or properly dispose ofit Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel 4 REFUELING WARNINGS Fu
432. re pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 251 If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Note The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full function of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 251 Replace the spare tire witha road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly
433. re your favorite radio stations To store a radio station tune to the station then press and hold a preset button until sound returns In CD mode select a track In phone mode enter a phone number Clock Push to access clock settings You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings Function buttons Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in such as Radio mode or CD mode Seek Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio station or disc track Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous or next strong radio station memory preset or through the current disc track 27 Audio System ON OFF Press this button to switch the system off and on Turn to adjust the volume MENU Press this button to access different audio system features See Menu Structure later in this section SOUND Press this button to access settings for Treble Middle Bass Fade and Balance Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings When you make your selection press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings Press OK to set or press MENU to exit Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently PHONE Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system See SYNC page 286 MEDIA Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the SYNC Media menu To c
434. reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote 395 become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRA
435. respect to such subject matter Appendices Severability You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois without giving effect to i its conflict of laws provisions or ii the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods which is explicitly excluded You agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder Government End Users f the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government this Data is a commercial term as that termis defined at 48 C F R FAR 2 101 is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use and be treated in accordance with such Notice NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER NAME NAVTEQ CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER ADDRESS 425 West Randolph Street Chicago IL 60606 This Data
436. rgo Management System ir Equipped E142445 The system is located in the floor of the cargo area Lift the handle to open Adjustable Load Floor if Equipped me A A E142446 Vehicles with the standard size spare tire can adjust the load floor to two positions The front of the load floor can be placed either on for high position or below for low position the ledges behind the rear seats The rear of the load floor always sits on the two small shelves located on the liftgate trim LUGGAGE COVERS ir EQUIPPED WARNINGS Make sure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash Use the cargo shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle Load Carrying E14244 Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear seat on the rear trim panels to install the cargo shade To operate the cargo shade 1 Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade rearward 2 Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS WARNING When loading the roof racks we recommend you evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center o
437. rior 229 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens Cleaning Leather Seats Cleaning the Alloy Wheels 231 Vehicle Storage 232 Wheels and Tires General Information ETES e PEE E AECA ATT Using SNOW Chains Tire Pressure Monitoring System Changing a Road Wheel Technical Specifications Capacities and Specific ations Engine Specifications 261 Motorcraft Parts 262 Vehicle Identification Number 263 Vehicle Certification Label 263 Transmission Code Designation 264 Technical Specifications 265 Audio System General Informati Audio unit Vehic AM FM CD Audio unit Vehic AM FM CD SY Audio unit Vehicles With AM FM CD SYNC Satellite RAG O TAR 272 Audio unit Vehicles With Premium AM EM CD een 274 Audio unit Vehicles With Sony AM FM CD innnan 276 Digital AUdIO 279 Satellite Radio 281 Table of Contents Auxiliary Input Jack USB POMtxcxicacwce MEGA ADS rer SYNCTM General Information 286 Using Voice Recognition 288 Using SYNC With Your Phone 290 SYNC Applications and Services 301 using SYNC With Your Media ELE E E EEE iii 307 SYNC Troubleshooting 314 MyFord Touch General Information 320 SOL INES Essen 327 Entertainment 336 Accessories ACCESSONES nn 380 Appendices End User License Agreement 382 Ford Extended Service Plan
438. rized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire Rotation Note f your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Wheels and Tires Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used ina tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life Front wheel drive vehicles front tires on the left side of the diagram
439. rned off either a voice message plays or a display message or icon comes on or both when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature 301 SYNCTM If a crash deploys an airbag excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca See Supplementary Restraints System page 35 Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter See Roadside Emergencies page 186 Important information about the fuel pump shut off is in this chapter Setting 911 Assist On 1 Press the phone button to enter the phone menu 2 Scroll to select 911 Assist 3 Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu 4 Scroll to select between On and Off 5 Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation Off selections include Off with reminder Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection at vehicle start Off without reminder Provides a display reminder
440. rom a full stop Avoid sudden braking Although a four wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it will not stop any faster as braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily As your vehicle has a four wheel anti lock brake system do not pump the brake pedal See Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Brakes page 145 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Note Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty For this reason we strongly recommend that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts i e lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using repla
441. ront airbag system consists of driver and passenger airbag modules front passenger sensing system CFA crash sensors and monitoring A system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 42 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 centimeters between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module To properly position yourself away from the airbag Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position Supplementary Restraints System After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it is very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child ina child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must u
442. rs program and erase user codes arm and disarm the anti theft alarm You can operate the keypad with the factory set five digit entry code The code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer You can also create up to five of your own five digit personal entry codes Programming a Personal Entry Code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press 1 2 on the keypad within five seconds Enter your personal five digit code You must enter each number within five seconds of each other Press 1 2 on the keypad to save personal code 1 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful 3 4 Locks To program additional personal entry codes repeat Steps 1 3 then for Step 4 press 3 4 to save personal code 2 press 56 to save personal code 3 press 7 8 to save personal code 4 press 9 0 to save personal code 5 Tips Donot set a code that uses five of the same number Do not use five numbers in sequential order The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing a Personal Code 1 Enter the factory set five digit code 2 Press and release 1 2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Press and hold 1 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes will erase and only the factory set five digit code wil
443. rvices or its use in vehicles When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link it can help you locate the best gas prices find movie listings get current traffic alerts view the current weather map get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games o If your vehicle is equipped with 2 Navigation touch the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route nearby your vehicle s current location or near any of your favorite places if programmed Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle s location or on an active navigation route Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times if available 363 Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather current weather or the five day forecast for the chosen area Select Map to see the weather map which can show storms radar information charts and winds Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski
444. s 46 centimeters apart A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Using Tether Straps Va Many forward facing child safety ils seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your
445. s display Compatible file formats are as follows jpg gif ong bmp Each file must be 1 5 MB or less Recommended dimensions 800 x 384 Sound Press the Settingsicon gt Sound then select from the following Sound Bass Midrange Treble Set Balance and Fade DSP Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have these sound settings Vehicle Press the Settings icon gt hs Vehicle then select from the following Vehicle Health Report Rear View Camera Enable Valet Mode Vehicle Health Report Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports Press for more information on these selections When done making your selections press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter See Information page 359 Rear View Camera This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera Press the Settings icon gt hs Vehicle gt Rear View Camera then select from the following settings Rear Camera Delay Visual Park Aid Alert Guidelines You can find more information on the rear view camerain another chapter See Rear View Camera page 156 Enable Valet Mode Note f the system locks and you need to reset the PIN enter 3681 and the system unlocks Valet mode allows you to lock the sy
446. s are programmed to your vehicle Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle and detectif an additional MyKey has been programmed USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system Vehicles With Ford approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems When using a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system the vehicle recognizes the remote start system as an additional admin key It is the vehicle s default setting You can also program the remote start as a MyKey As a result the MyKey system status menu display includes the remote start system as an additional key in the total count of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED See Checking MyKey System Status page 50 5 When you start your vehicle with a Ford approved aftermarket remote start system the system stalls the engine after you open the door or shift the vehicle into gear This is intentional When you restart your vehicle it reads your real key traditional key or intelligent key fob status instead of the remote start system s status As an added precaution owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to program the remote start systemasa MyKey if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob That way
447. s to the closed direction after the liftgate has stopped in the open position four short warning chimes indicate excessive weight on the gate ora possible gas strut failure Have the system checked by an authorized dealer if you still have the issue after you remove the load Opening and Closing the Liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate 60 Note Do not leave the liftgate open while driving This could damage the liftgate and its components Note You can stop the liftgate movement direction with a second press of the instrument panel button or the control button on the liftgate a second double press of the transmitter button or by using a kicking motion with your foot for hands free liftgates From the Instrument Panel With the Remote Control Hands Free Feature If Equipped Press the instrument panel button Press the remote control button twice within three seconds Make sure you have an intelligent access transmitter within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate E161602 1 Move your foot under and away from the rear bumper similar to a kicking motion Do not move your foot sideways or the sensors may not detect the motion Locks 2 Theliftgate will power open or close Note Allow the power
448. s to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA Security Updates Digital Rights Management Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property included copyrighted content Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content This action does not affect unprotected content When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade Appendices Consent to Use of Data You agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services MS Microsoft
449. s while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked Obtain immediate service if a system error is detected You may not notice any difference in the feel of your steering but a serious condition may exist Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power assisted steering system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls check for an improperly inflated tire uneven tire wear loose or worn suspension components loose or worn steering components improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull 165 Load Carrying REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE Passenger Compartment Floor E78097 The under floor storage compartment is located behind the front passenger seat Ca
450. safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing Vehicle Care WARNINGS On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system 230 Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upp
451. se a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back E142846 Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash 37 KNEE AIRBAG A driver s knee airbag is located under the instrument panel During a crash the restraints control module may activate the driver s knee airbag based on crash severity and occupant conditions Under certain crash and occupant conditions the driver s knee airbag may deploy but the driver s front airbag may not activate As with front and side airbags it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury e Make sure the knee airbag is N operating properly See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 42 FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death Sitting improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or dea
452. seat Child Safety Note The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint See Seats page 109 BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash Use a belt positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 pounds 18 kilograms and 80 pounds 36 kilograms and upward to 100 pounds 45 kilograms if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat eer LO E142595 Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt cent
453. seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles 12 Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death Using Your Vehicle Witha Snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However you must not compromise your own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile communication equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messa
454. seat to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Do not do the following Place heavy objects on the seat Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge E138653 Adjust the control to the desired heat setting REAR SEAT ARMREST ir EQUIPPED E138656 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder Universal Garage Door Opener if Equipped HomeLink Wireless Control System If Equipped WARNING Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door opener which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death Note Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage Note Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming Note We recommend that upon the sale or lease terminati
455. sed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See SYNC page 286 Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less Introduction The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was travelling and Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur Note Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see l
456. send and receive text messages using Bluetooth read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such as LOL 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Select Messaging 3 Choose from the following Listen speaker icon Dial Send Text View Delete Composing a Text Message Note This is a speed dependent feature It is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Touch Messaging gt Send Text MyFord Touch it equipped 3 Enter a phone number or choose from Receiving a Text Message younphonebook Note f you select View and your vehicle 4 You can select from the following is traveling over 3 mph 5 km h the system options offers to read the message to you instead Send which sends the message as it of allowing you to view it while driving IS When a new message arrives an audible Edit Text which allows you to tone sounds and the screen displays a customize the pre defined message or pop up with the caller name and ID if create a message on your own supported by your phone You can press You can then preview the message verify View to view the text message the recipient as well as update the Listen for SYNC to read the message message list and send it to a connected
457. sic processed during indexing Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your music System Settings Access Bluetooth Device menu listings Add Connect Set as Primary On and Off Delete as well as Advanced menu listings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs to index If autoplay is on you can listen to media processed during indexing If autoplay is off you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum indexing file size If you have already connected a device to the USB port you cannot access the line in feature Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs the system needs to process 310 SYNCTM Accessing Your Play Menu 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist album genre playlist the media menu 2 Scroll to Play Press OK track similar music or e
458. side of a vehicle In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNINGS Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is
459. sired mileage interval Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information 304 SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information TDI Note SYNC Services requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Using SYNC With Your Phone page 290 Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Make sure your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services SYNCTM Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation
460. site at www ford ca Roadside Emergencies HAZARD WARNINGFLASHERS Note f used when the vehicle is not running the battery will lose charge There may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle located on the instrument panel Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists The hazard warning button is Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function and the front and rear direction indicators will flash Press the button again to turn them off FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition off Turn the ignition to crank Turn the ignition off Turn the ignition on again to re enable the fuel pump For vehicles equipped with a push button start system 2 3 4 187 1 Press the START STOP button to turn the ignition off Press the brake pedal and press the START STOP button crank attempt Remove your foot from the brake pedal an
461. smission Warning Chime Sounds when you have not moved the transmission selector lever to position P A message will be shown in the display Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel Corresponding information is displayed in the information display Information Display Controls E138659 88 Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu Press the left arrow button to exit a menu Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display escape button Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages The OK button may also be used to reset some Trip values Menu Structure Information Display All Vehicles You can access the menu using the
462. st setting Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows Close the instrument panel vents 106 Climate Control Maximum Cooling Performancein Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions 1 Adjust the temperature control to the lowest setting 2 Press the A C and recirculated air buttons 3 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting initially and then adjust it to suit the desired comfort level HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Heated Rear Window Note You must switch the ignition on to use this feature Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog Press the button again within 14 minutes to switch it off It switches off automatically after 14 minutes or when you switch the ignition off Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines Your warranty does not cover this damage Heated Exterior Mirror if Equipped Note Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass that has frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products The heated mirrors remove ice mist and fog when you switch on the heat
463. st settings for Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal processing Occupancy Mode Speed Compensated Volume Note Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings Set PTY for Seek Scan This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category RDS Text Display This allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations AST AST Autostore allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location TAG Button This feature is available when HD Radio is on and allows you to tag a song to download later When you select On TAG appears on screen when HD Radio is active You can touch TAG to save the information of the song that is playing When you plug in your portable music player the information transfers if supported by your device When you are connected to iTunes the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download See HD Radio information later in this chapter MyFord Touch it equipped Direct Tune Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number Touch Enter when you are done HD Radio Information If Available Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows
464. stem No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Enable Valet Mode 2 When prompted enter a four digit PIN After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again Settings Access and adjust system settings voice features as well as phone navigation and wireless settings MyFord Touch f Equipped System Press the Settings icon gt hs Settings gt System then select from the following System Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English Spanish Distance or French Select to display units in kilometers or miles Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit System Prompt Volume Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system Touch Screen Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen Touch Panel Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses Master Reset Voice Control Select to restore factory defaults This erases all personal settings and personal data Press the Settings icon gt Thy Settings gt Voice Control then
465. switch on the ignition and the radio Put the transmission in position P Note 7o scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system 291 1 Press the phone button and then scroll to System Settings Press OK Scroll to Bluetooth Devices Press OK Scroll to Add Bluetooth Device Press OK When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your phone s manual if necessary When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to set the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up and download your phone book Phone Voice Commands Press the voice icon and say Phone Say any of the following PHONE Call lt name gt u12 Call lt name gt at home Call lt name gt at work 11 2 Call lt name gt in office Call lt name gt on mobile OR cell ul 2 Call lt name gt on other n2 Call history incoming Call history missed SYNCTM PHONE Call history outgoing n2 Connections Dial Go to privacy Hold Join 124 Menu Phone book lt name gt DIAL
466. system to open the liftgate Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation Note Splashing water may cause the hands free liftgate to open Keep the intelligent access transmitter away from the rear bumper detection area while washing your Car With the Outside Control Button Opening 1 Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate the liftgate will unlock when you press the liftgate release button E138632 2 Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note Allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation 61 Closing amp E138636 Press and release the button WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Setting the Liftgate Open Height 1 Open the liftgate 2 Manually move the liftgate to the desired height 3 Press and hold the control button on the liftgate until you hear a chime indicating programming is complete Note You cannot program the height if the liftgate position is too low The new open liftgate height will now be recalled when the power liftgate is opened To change the programm
467. t setting for the manual zoom is OFF Rear Camera Delay When shifting the transmission out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the camera image remains in the display until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on or until a radio button is selected Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic on winding roads or when the road surface is slippery This could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death When you are going downhill your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed The system will not apply the brakes Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set speed Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Note Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed while driving uphill E142437 The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel Switching Cruise Control On Press and release ON 159 The indicator will display in the instrument cluster Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Pr
468. t Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE land ICE 2 buttons The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process View categorized lists of voice commands 335 MyFord Touch i equipped To access Help using the voice commands say Help The system provides allowable press the voice button then after the tone voice commands for the current mode ENTERTAINMENT nmo OO amp gt E161892 AM 1 and AM AST FM 1 FM 2 and FM AST SIRIUS CD USB Touch this button to scroll down for more options such as SD Card BT Stereo and A V In These buttons change with the media mode you are in H Radio memory presets and CD controls T M O O gt a Note Some features may not be available in your area Contact an authorized dealer Browsing Device Content for more information When listening to audio on a device you You can access these options using the can browse through other devices without touchscreen or voice commands having to change sources For example if you are currently listening to audio on an SD card you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device 336 MyFord Touch it equipped Press the voice icon on the ns steering wheel When prompted you can say BROWSE within devices Browse Wwe Browse lt leagu
469. t fuses If you need to replace one of these high current fuses see an authorized dealer Power Distribution Box WARNINGS Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNINGS To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs The power distribution box is in the engine compartment It has high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads You will need to reset some features if you disconnect and reconnect the battery See Changing the 12V Battery page 216 E157389 Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover to remove it 197 Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F7 4OA Anti lock brake system and electronic stability program pump F8 30A Electronic stability program valve F9 Not used F10 40A Heater blower motor F11 30A Body control module feed F12 30A Powertrain control module relay fuse F13 30A Starter relay F14 25A Rear power window without door control unit Fl 20A Front cigar lighter or power outlet F16 25A Front power window without door control unit F17 20A Rear power outlet F18 20A Center power outlet F19 5A Anti lock brake system and electronic stability program 15 feed
470. t has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size 247 WARNINGS may be found on either the Sa
471. t qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy See Scheduled Maintenance page 400 If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle Precautions Do not work on a hot engine Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the Engine Off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turnoffthe engine and remove the key if equipped 3 Block the wheels Working with the Engine On WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 1 Set the
472. tart the engine within 20 seconds of switching it off even if a valid key is not present Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off press the brake pedal and press the button After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer restart the engine without the key present inside your vehicle Once the engine has started it remains running until you press the button even if the system does not detect a valid key If you open andclose a door while the engine is running the system searches for a valid key You cannot restart the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there 3 Start the engine Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 Turn the key to position 3 Apply the parking brake Vehicles with Keyless Start 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 Press the button once 3 Apply the parking brake Note This switches off the ignition all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators Starting and Stopping the Engine Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result ina
473. tates Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www fordowner com 190 These are some of the items that can be found online U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Manuals Maintenance Schedules Recalls Ford Extended Service Plans Ford Genuine Accessories Service specials and promotions In Canada Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6K OC8 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center Customer Assistance In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center Vehicle Identification Number Your telephone number hom
474. te Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The system uses red yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The alert highlights the closest object detected The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled highlighted areas are still displayed Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on the full area behind the vehicle is not shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature Note Vanual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline is shown 158 This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R Reverse When the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again Selectable settings for this feature are OFF Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 Press the up and down arrows to change the view The selection level appears between the buttons for example Level 1 The defaul
475. ted information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated with a music file to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote respectively
476. tellite service is no longer available Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues None found Check Channel Guide All the channels in the selected category are either skipped or locked Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip function on that station Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle No action required 283 Audio System AUXILIARY INPUT JACK WARNINGS Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control crash and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any hand held device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving Store the portable music player ina secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is moving Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored w
477. tem to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive Wheels and Tires How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Sport utility vehicles s and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be E168583 As aresult of the above dimensional differences Sport utility vehicles and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that E145299 Higher to allow higher load carrying make your vehicle so versatile also make capacity and to allow it to travel over it handle differently than an ordinary rough terrain without getting hung up passenger Car or damaging underbody components Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use 235 Wheels and Tires TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading A 5 f er E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and m
478. th in a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death Supplementary Restraints System This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not E145987 The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel Note When the ignition is first turned on the passenger airbag off light will illuminate for a short period of time to confirm it is functional The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empt
479. the chosen type of music You can only play genres of music that are present in the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media player Similar music The system compiles a playlist and then plays music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information 308 SYNCTM Voice command guide Search or Play artist track or album The system searches for specific artist track or album information from the music indexed through the USB port Refine This allows you to make your previous command more specific For example if you asked to search and play all music by a certain artist you could then say Refine album and choose a specific album from the list to view If you then select Play the system only plays music from that specific album Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs the system needs to process Press the voice icon When prompted say Media Menu Features Bluetooth audio then any of the The media menu allows you to select your following media source how to play your music suchas by artist genre shuffle or repeat BLUETOOTH AUDIO and also to add connect or delete devices Connections Pause 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu 2 Scroll to cycle through Play Play next track Play previous track
480. the limitations of the system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system may create false beeps Note Keep the sensors located on the bumper or fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt If the sensors are covered the system s accuracy can be affected Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects Note f your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms Note f your vehicle is equipped with MyKey it is possible to prevent
481. the system to function efficiently the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open Note At low ambient temperatures with AUTO selected the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents and fan may run at a slow speed until the engine warms up Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting Press the high fan speed button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting 3 Adjust the air distribution control to the floor air vents position Press the floor button to distribute air to the floor air vents 104 Climate Control Recommended Settings for Heating Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting midway point of the hot settings Press the AUTO button Adjust the temperature control to the Set the temperature to 720F 220C Adjust the air distribution control to the floor and windshield air vents position Cooling the Interior Quickly Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting Press the MAX A C button Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A C position Adjust the air
482. the three HomeLink buttons are pressed FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user s authority to operate the equipment Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket if equipped Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury Note f used when the engine is not running the battery will discharge There may be insufficient power to restart your engine Note Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Note Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Note Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow Note Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element Note mproper use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty Note Always
483. ther strap symbol and are partially covered by the gap panel Pull the panel back to fully expose the anchors r 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use E142539 CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside Child Safety AA E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Left Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock Right Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock 25 Safety Belts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or out
484. this chapter Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on anda short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Wheels and Tires When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle 253 When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure Possible cause warning light Customer action required Solid warni
485. tical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Limitations on Distributing Copying Modifying and Creating Derivative Works You may not distribute copy make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Single EULA The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software Even if you receive multiple EULAs you are licensed to use only one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE 383 this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agree
486. tically be extended if you are in the process of driving off 4 Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will release automatically 139 Four Wheel Drive it Equipped PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION This system is a proactive system It has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels before slip occurs Even when wheel slip is not present the system is continuously making adjustments to the torque distribution in an attempt to improve straight line and cornering behavior both on and off road The system automatically turns on every time you switch the ignition on All components of the system are sealed and do not require maintenance USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Note When a system malfunction is present a warning message will be displayed in the information display See Information Messages page 91 This means the system is not functioning correctly and has defaulted to front wheel drive only Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer Note A message will be displayed in the information display when the system overheats and switches to front wheel drive This condition may occur if you operate your vehicle in extreme high load conditions or with excessive wheel slip i e deep sand To resume four wheel drive function as soon as possible stop your vehicle in a safe location and switch the ignition off After the system cools and normal four wheel drive functionality resumes
487. ties Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s user guide for further information For your safety some SYNC functions are speed dependent Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph 5 km h Make sure that you review your device s manual before using it with SYNC Speed restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary Screens crowded with information such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores movie times or ski conditions Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted such as entering a navigation destination or editing information All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries See the following chart for more specific examples Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts from a USB List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries System Functionality Editing the keypad code Enabling Valet Mode 323 MyFord Touch i equipped Restricted features Editing settings while the rear view camera or active
488. tion or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association B 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width D R Indicates a radial type tire E 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter F 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your owner s manual If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 239 G H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Letter Speedrating mph rating km h M
489. to aim the headlamp 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is non adjustable Maintenance REMOVING A HEADLAMP E142468 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood 2 Remove the two screws from the headlamp assembly 3 Carefully pull the headlamp assembly as far as possible towards the front of the vehicle to disengage it from the lower fixing point 4 Carefully lift the outer side of the headlamp and remove it 5 Disconnect the electrical connector CHANGING A BULB Lamp Assembly Condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be anatural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are Water puddle inside the lamp Large water droplets drip marks
490. to five seconds Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Wheels and Tires Driving habits havea great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety Observe posted speed limits Avoid fast starts stops and turns Avoid potholes and objects on the road Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 249 Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an autho
491. to the tire being changed 256 Wheels and Tires WARNINGS If your vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under your vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire Note Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Park ona level surface set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers 2 Place the transmission selector lever in position P and turn the engine off Remove the carpeted wheel cover 4 Remove the wing nut that secures the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise a E160855 5 Remove the jack from the foam holder The lug wrench is located in the left side storage foam next to the spare tire Remove the flat tire retainer strap from the jack base a gt gue E142551 6 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 7 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground Note Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle 8 The vehicle jacking points are shown here
492. tory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook call history text messages and paired devices Press OK to select 2 Press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the display 3 Press OK to confirm Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC all phonebook call history text messages and all paired devices and return to the factory default settings Return Exit the current menu SYNC TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use However should questions arise see the tables below Use the website at any time to check your phone s compatibility register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat during certain hours Visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca for more information Phone issues Possible cause s Possible solution s There is excessive back ground noise during a phone call The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC perform ance Review your phone s manual about audio adjustments During a call can hear the other person but they cannot hear me This may be a possible phone malfunction Try turning off the device resetting the device removing the device s battery then trying again SYNC is not able to down load my phonebook G
493. trols Do not press hard on the controls They are sensitive to light touch Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch control graphic Touching off center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby control Make sure your hands are clean and dry Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger you may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference for example inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you meant to turn on Depending on your vehicle and option package you may also have these controls on your bezel Power Switch the media or climate features off and on VOL Control the volume of playing media Fan Control the speed of the climate system fan Seek and Tune buttons Use as you normally would in media modes Eject Eject a CD from the entertainment system SOURCE Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes The screen does not change but you see the media change in the lower left status bar SOUND Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can adjust settings such as Bass Treble Midrange Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have all of these sound options Hazard flasher Switch the hazard flashers off and on
494. ts When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 252 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System D E142549 Note Fach road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer Check the tire pressure periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in
495. ts weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands 1 Press the voice button 305 2 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 3 Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu 1 Press the phone button to enter the phone menu Scroll to Services Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu The display indicates the system is connecting Press OK SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 2 3 Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say B
496. ts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seat back if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a crash Read the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Safety Belts Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced However if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Properly care for safety belts See Vehicle Care page 227 33 Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analy
497. ty ii violates any law statute ordinance or regulation including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming privacy consumer and child protection obscenity or defamation or iii is harmful threatening abusive harassing tortuous defamatory vulgar obscene libelous or otherwise objectionable and f lease rent out or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav 4 Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law in no event will TeleNav its licensors and suppliers or agents or employees of any of the foregoing be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software Such data may not always reflect reality due to among other things road closures construction weather new roads and other changing conditions You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software For example but without limitation you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well being or survival of you or others is dependent onthe accuracy of navigation asthe maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications especi
498. ty 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly do not Exceed 70 mph 113 km h Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time Use commercial car washing equipment Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly The usage of a full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following Handling stability and braking performance Comfort and noise Ground clearance and parking at curbs Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability All wheel driving capability When driving with the full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to Towing a trailer Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible Tire Change Procedure WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if your vehicle is in position P To help prevent your vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of your vehicle
499. ty See Amber Displayed when the blind spot information manual system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 BLIS X sensor fault Amber Displayed when a fault with the system has Service required occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BLIS not available Trailer Amber Displayed when the system is not available due attached to trailer use See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 Cross Traffic Vehicle Amber Displayed when the system detects a vehicle coming from X See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 92 Information Displays Message Message Action Indicator Cross Traffic Sensor Amber Displayed when the blind spot information blocked See manual system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 Cross Traffic fault Amber Displays when the system requires service due Service required to a malfunction Contact your authorized dealer Cross Traffic disabled Displayed when the systemis not available due Trailer attached to trailer use See Blind Spot Monitor page 160 Doors Message Message Action Indicator X door open Red Displays when the door s listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving Displays when the door s listed is not completely closed Liftgate ajar Red Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely closed and the vehicle is movi
500. uch as Listening Success Failed Paused or Try Again Howto Use Voice Commands with Your System Press the voice icon After the us tone speak your command clearly These commands can be said at any time during a voice session Cancel Exit Go back List of commands Main menu Next page Previous page What can say Help 325 What Can I Say To access the available voice commands for the current session do one of the following During a voice session press the Help icon in the lower left status bar of the screen Say What can say for an on screen listing of the possible voice commands associated with your current voice session Press the voice icon After the tone say Help to hear a list of possible voice commands Helpful Hints Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system Speak naturally without long pauses between words At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon Accessing a List of Available Commands If you use the touchscreen press the Settings ico
501. ughness Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES The wiper arms can be manually moved when the ignition is off This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass E129990 2 2 Press the locking buttons together 3 Rotate and remove the wiper blade 4 Install in the reverse order Note Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on To change the rear blades do the following 1 Lift the wiper arm a 2 Slightly rotate the wiper blade from the wiper arm 3 Disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm 4 Remove the wiper blade E130060 Maintenance 5 Install in the reverse order Note Vake sure that the wiper blade locks into place Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER Gs E142710 1 6L and 2 0L EcoBoost Engines 2 5L Engine WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running When chan
502. und and the turn signals will flash if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed Note f locking was not successful or any door or the liftgate is open or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash Liftgate WARNINGS Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using the liftgate control Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury Locks Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate YAW Press twice within three seconds 2X E to unlatch a manual liftgate open close or stop the movement of a power liftgate See Power Liftgate page 59 Mechanical Key Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle once to lock all doors Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle once to unlock the driver door only Locking the Doors Individually If the power locks fail to operate lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown E112203 Left Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock Right Hand Sid
503. und returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset the sound mutes before the digital audio plays because the system has to reacquire the digital signal Note As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact
504. upant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes E152533 The system consists of the following A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks Front passenger sensing system e Crash sensors and monitoring A system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 42 Note The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat Supplementary Restraints System The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags SAFETY CANOPYTM WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash Do not lean your head on the door The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner Do not attempt to service repair or modify the curtain airbags its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehi
505. ure which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on screen selections This is available only when the system displays a list of candidates generated during a voice session For example when entering in a street address or trying to call a contact from the phone you paired to the system MyFord Touch it equipped Under this menu you can set Thy your clock access and adjust the display sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature Clock Note You cannot manually set the date Your vehicle s GPS does this for you Note f the battery has been disconnected your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock Once your vehicle acquires the signal it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time 1 Press the Settings icon gt Clock 2 Press and to adjust the time From this screen you can also make other adjustments such as 12 hour or 24 hour mode activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update new time zones You can also turn the outside air temperature display off and on It appears at the top center of the touchscreen next to the time and date The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings Display You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted
506. ure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury Keep keys out of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate Locks Note Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position Make sure that you close the liftgate before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure You could damage the liftgate or its components Note Do not hang anything for example a bike rack from the spoiler glass or liftgate This could damage the liftgate and its components If the vehicle is running the liftgate will only operate with the transmission in P Three warning tones will sound once as the liftgate begins to power close Five short chimes indicate a problem with the open or close request caused by the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate fall
507. ures Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add connect and delete devices set a phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off 298 SYNCTM 1 Press the phone button to enter the 3 Scroll to Bluetooth Devices Press OK phone menu 4 Scroll to select from the following 2 Scroll to System Settings Press OK options If you select You can Add Bluetooth Device See Using SYNC With Your Phone page 290 Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth enabled phone 1 Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones 2 Scroll until you find the desired device and then press OK to connect the phone Set as Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone Press OK to confirm SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle When you select a phone as a primary phone it appears first in the list and the system marks it with an asterisk Set Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off Make a selection and then press OK Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features Delete Device Delete a paired phone Press OK and scroll to select the device Press O
508. urn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering can result 141 in loss of vehicle control Apply smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal when changes in vehicle speed are required Avoid abrupt steering acceleration and braking This could result in an increased risk of vehicle roll over loss of vehicle control and personal injury Use all available road surface to bring your vehicle to a safe direction of travel In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements If your vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way your vehicle responds to a maneuver i e steering acceleration or braking Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time This will cause the system to overheat A message will be displayed in the information display See Information Messages page 91 To resume operation switch the ignition off and allow the system to cool down for aminimum of 15 minutes Aft
509. urs with the engine off followed by city or highway driving Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNINGS Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can Start a fire Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly Use only the specified fuel listed Avoid running out of fuel Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed inscheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If oth
510. use high occupancy vehicle lanes High occupancy vehicle lanes are also known as carpool or diamond lanes People who ride in buses vanpools or carpools use these lanes Note f your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the Start Route button the system defaults to the Fastest Route option and begins guidance 372 During route guidance you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner green bar if you want the system to repeat route guidance information When the system repeats the last guidance instruction it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction since it detects when the vehicle is moving Point of Interest POI Categories Main categories Food Drink amp Dining Travel amp Transportation Financial Emergency Community Health amp Medicine Automotive Shopping Entertainment amp Arts Recreation amp Sports Government Domestic Services Subcategories Restaurant Golf Parking Home amp Garden Personal Care Services Auto Dealership MyFord Touch it equipped Subcategories Govt Office Public Transit Education To expand these listings press the in front of the listing The system also allows you to sort alphabetically by distance or by cityseekr listings if available cityseekr Note cityseekr
511. usiness search and then Search near me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a SYNCTM Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support Follow the voice prompts to select your destination Once you select your destination the system uploads your current vehicle location calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle After the route download is complete the phone call automatically ends You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination 3 While on an active route you can select or say Route summary or Route status to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and the system sends a new route to your vehicle Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1
512. vehicle We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times These intervals serve two purposes one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner s manual See Capacities and Specifications page 261 Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership Factory Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts Dealerships stock Ford Motorcraft and Ford authorized branded re manufactured replacement parts These parts meet or exceed our specifications Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 12 month or 12000 mile 20000 kilometer parts and labor limited warranty If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance
513. vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in R Reverse E124788 Note BLIS is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects or to detect parked vehicles people animals or infrastructure fences guardrails trees etc It is designed to alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zones Note When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone typically fewer than two seconds the system does not trigger Using the Systems BLIS turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven forward above 3 mph 5 km h it remains on while the transmission is in D Drive and N Neutral If shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system enters cross traffic alert mode Once shifted back into D Drive BLIS turns back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph 5 km h Note BL S does not function in R Reverse or P Park or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet 14 meters away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness WARNING To help avoid personalinjury NEVER use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space Cross traffic alert is not a replacement for careful driving a
514. ven to explore what If there are no media files to access the is on your USB device display indicates there is no media If there Note f your digital media player has a are media files you have the following power switch make sure you switch it on before plugging it in options When you select You can Play All Play all indexed media tracks from your playing device in flat file mode one at a time in numerical order Press OK to select The first track title appears in the display Artists Sort all indexed media by artist Once selected the system lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically If there are fewer than 255 indexed artists the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 the system categorizes them alphabetically 1 Press OK to select You can select to play All Artists or any indexed artist 2 Scroll to choose the desired artist Press OK Albums Sort all indexed media by albums If there are fewer than 255 indexed albums the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 the system categorizes them alphabetically 1 Press OK to enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album 2 Scroll to choose the desired album Press OK Genres Sort indexed music by genre category type SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mod
515. veness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS amp GLOBAL INITIATIVES Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 Fax 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 3673 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS amp GLOBAL INITIATIVES Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www
516. ver 3 Remove the bulb 3 Remove the two bolts from the lamp Reverse steps to reinstall bulb assembly 4 Gently pull the lamp assembly away Replacing High Mount Brake Lamp from the vehicle Bulb Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high mount stop lamp located in the spoiler It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required see your authorized dealer E142475 5 Disconnect the electrical connector 225 Maintenance BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Trade number Headlamps high beam Halogen 9O05LL Headlamps high beam HID H1 Headlamp low beam Halogen HILL Headlamp low beam HID D3S Sidemarker front 168 Park lamp front HI Series WY5W Park lamp front Low Series 194 Turn lamp front HI Series WY21W Turn lamp front Low Series W21W Fog lamps H10 9145 Tail brake lamp 3157K Turn lamp rear T20 Backup lamp 921 License plate lamp W5W High mount brake lamp LED Interior lamps LED To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer To replace all instrument panel l
517. webbing to retract further The safety belt should then unlock If the safety belt does not unlock repeat steps 1 3 2 Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso If the safety belt is too short when fully extended you can obtain a safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended Safety Belts SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt correctly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in acrash E87511 Conditions of operation To adjust the shoulder belt height squeeze the button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place SAFETY BELT WARNINGLAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME audible warning will sound if the driver s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle s ignition is turned on This lamp illuminates and an The driver s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turn
518. when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and Traffic Directions and Information MyFord Touch it equipped Using Voice Recognition This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings The system also asks short questions confirmation prompts whenit is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request When using voice commands words and icons may appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session s
519. ws you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings N DR NN X Note You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise Press the switch to open the window Lift the switch to close the window E70848 One Touch Down if Equipped Press the switch fully and release it Press again or lift it to stop the window One Touch Up if Equipped Lift the switch fully and release it Press or lift it again to stop the window Window Lock E70850 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls It will illuminate when the rear window controls are locked Bounce Back if Equipped The window will stop automatically while closing It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way Overriding the Bounce Back Feature WARNING When you override the bounce back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle Proceed as follows to override this protection feature when there is a resistance for example in winter 1 Close the window twice until it reaches the point of resistance and let it reverse Windows and Mirrors 2 Close the window a third time to the point of resistance The bounce back feature is n
520. y 38 When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator does not illuminate then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the passenger airbag status indicator will not illuminate If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable
521. y Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition off before performing this procedure 1 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool between the shifter bezel and the top finish panel Use the tool to unsnap the shifter bezel from the finish panel Transmission 2e 3 Locate the white lever located on the left side of the shifter 4 Using the tool move the white lever E142627 towards the rear of the shifter While holding the white lever in the rear position move the shifter from the park position Press the shifter bezel back into the top finish panel until it snaps back into position Apply the brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake Note See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow 7 Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than aminute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear 138 HILL START ASSIST WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake When you leave your vehicle always apply the parking brake and put the vehicle
522. y also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See SYNC page 286 Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches that you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the Introduction vendorsit uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See SYNC page 286 CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Some constituents of engine exhaust certain vehicle components certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLO
523. y assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available 24 hours seven days a week for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner s Manual portfolio Roadside assistance will cover a flat tire change with a good spare if provided with the vehicle except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit battery jump start lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5 liters of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9 liters of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries towing Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 kilometers of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 kilometers from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 kilometers Trailers sh
524. y curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof pillar trim A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment Supplementary Restraints System e N The crash sensors and monitoring system have a readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 42 Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of your vehicle 42 Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide infor
525. ys integrated keyhead transmitters only are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences See your authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note You can program a maximum of eight coded keys to your vehicle All eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys Security You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded k
526. ze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors Driver s seat position sensor Front passenger sensing system Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp Front crash severity sensors Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors Restraint system warning light and backup tone The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How Does the Personal Safety System Work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module During a crash the restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and may activate either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions Supplementary Restraints System

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

    Clothianidin Master Label Tier 1 Crops only  ABAQUS Front End (AFE) User Manual  LG BD460 Specification Sheet  Kärcher SE 3001  ASUSTOR USER GUIDE  DCM100 User`s Manual  Viewsonic LED LCD CDX4650-L  ERP : Mode d`emploi - Lettre d`informations - SE-Unsa  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file